JP7221555B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition.

Conventionally, when a game ball wins a prize in the starting hole, various effects are performed based on the determination result of whether or not to perform a special game, and there is a game machine that outputs, for example, a song during the execution of the effect (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP 2015-96091 A

However, there is room for improvement in order to improve the interest when sound is output during the performance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

The present invention employs the following configurations in order to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises determining means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed when a starting condition is established, and a special game being executed before the special game determination is performed. Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute, symbol control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by changing and then stopping the symbol, output means for outputting sound, and controlling the effect. and effect control means, wherein the effect control means is capable of receiving a predetermined signal, and suggests that the first effect and the special game be performed based on the result of the special game determination. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect, it is possible to execute an operation promoting effect to prompt an operation to the operation means, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and the special game in the special game determination when executing a first effect pattern including the first effect and the suggestive effect of the first number of times, and a second effect including the suggestive effect of the second number of times different from the first number of times There is a time to execute a performance pattern, and when the first performance pattern is executed, during the first performance, the output of the first sound that has been output before the execution of the first performance can be continued, and Before executing the suggestive effect, the operation promoting effect is executed, and in response to the execution of the operation promoting effect, the second sound output before execution of the operation promoting effect is stopped and the second sound is changed. can limit the output of a predetermined different sound, and when the second effect pattern is executed, during the first suggestive effect executed before the second suggestive effect, the It is possible to continue the output of the first sound that has been output before execution of the first suggestion performance, and to execute the operation promotion performance before executing the second suggestion performance, and to perform the operation promotion performance. when, in response to execution, the second sound output before execution of the operation promoting effect is stopped, and the first effect is started when a first time elapses from the start of output of the first sound; There is a case where the first effect is started when a second time has elapsed from the start of output of the first sound, and the first sound can be output according to the start of fluctuation of the symbol, and the second sound. It is possible to output a pre-effect sound based on the pre-determination during a predetermined period during which the is stopped.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve interest by using sound.

Schematic front view of pachinko game machine 1 Schematic plan view showing part of pachinko game machine 1 Enlarged view of indicator 4 in FIG. Explanatory drawing showing an example of the attitude mode of the production lever 28 Block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko game machine 1 Flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100 Detailed flow chart of the starting port switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing special symbol processing in step S4 in FIG. Flowchart showing details of jackpot determination processing in step S407 of FIG. Flowchart showing details of the variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the stopping process in step S416 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the normal design process of step S5 in FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the big winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG. Detailed flow chart of electric tulip processing in Fig. 6 It is a diagram showing the breakdown of the jackpot pattern selected according to the winning to each starting port, and the diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each pattern. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table used for selecting a jackpot variation pattern, which is a table used when the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot. A reach fluctuation table used for selecting a reach fluctuation pattern when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is a failure and a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more is selected using reach random numbers. A diagram showing an example of a pattern table A table used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the reach random number is used to determine that the variation time longer than a predetermined time is not selected, and the table is used to select a loss variation pattern. A diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table A diagram showing the flow of the special symbol variation and the production accompanying it when the losing variation pattern is selected as the special symbol variation pattern. A diagram showing a specific example of an effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 5 when a losing variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. A diagram showing an example of the composition of music used in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1. A diagram showing the flow of special symbol fluctuation and fluctuation production when the jackpot fluctuation pattern or reach fluctuation pattern is selected A diagram showing an example of BGM control when an N-reach effect is performed. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a failure and an effect is performed according to the effect pattern of FIG. A diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect An example of a screen diagram following FIG. 26, showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit. An example of a screen diagram following FIG. 26, showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a failure. A diagram showing an example of BGM control when a pseudo-fluctuation effect is performed. A diagram showing an example of the display mode of decorative patterns during each production A diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SP ready-to-win effect is further developed into the SP ready-to-win effect. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram after the SP reach effect is started FIG. 32(H) is an example of an effect following (H), showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, which is the effect following FIG. 32 (F) A diagram showing an example of sound control after the end of the SPSP ready-to-win production in the case of a big hit or a loss A diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed from the N ready-to-win effect. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect An example of a screen diagram following FIG. 37, showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit. A diagram showing an example of BGM control when a first effect is executed while BGM1 is being output when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit. A diagram showing an example of the BGM playback position at the time when each effect is started A diagram showing an example of BGM control when a premium effect is executed while BGM1 is being output when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit. A diagram showing an example of BGM control when an operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the last big win notification effect in the effect pattern of FIG. 41 when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win. A diagram showing an example of control of the second operation promotion effect and BGM at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect in FIG. An example of control of BGM when the first operation promotion performance is performed immediately before the premium performance and the second operation promotion performance is performed immediately before the last big win notification performance when the result of the special pattern determination is the big win. diagram showing A diagram showing an example of control of BGM when a notice effect is executed while BGM1 is being output when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit. An example of control of BGM when a first operation promotion performance is performed immediately before the notice performance and a second operation promotion performance is performed immediately before the last big win notification performance when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win. diagram showing A diagram showing an example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. A diagram showing another example of BGM control when the third operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a specific rendering of the rendering pattern shown in FIG. 44, and a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5; The figure which shows an example of the production|presentation following FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a specific rendering of the rendering pattern shown in FIG. 46, and a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5; FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47, and a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5; A diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed according to an operation during the third operation promotion effect. FIG. 53 is a modification of FIG. 53 and shows an example of an effect in which a blackout effect is performed immediately before the third operation promotion effect. FIG. 53 is a modification of FIG. 53 and shows an example of the effect when the blackout effect is performed during the third operation promotion effect. FIG. 53 is a modification of FIG. 53, showing an example of the effect in which the blackout effect is performed without the third operation promotion effect being performed and develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control unit 130 Flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of pending command processing in step 1302 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of an image sound control unit 140 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control unit 140 Detailed flowchart of processing during variation effect in step 1404 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of sound control processing in step S1422 in FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining a modified example of the additional display displayed in addition to the numbers forming the decorative pattern. Explanatory drawing for explaining the modification of the decorative design of the first mode and the second mode

Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko game machine 1]
First, the schematic configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As exemplified in FIG. 1, a pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a game board 2 on which accessories related to winning and determination (lottery) are provided, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2 . The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which game balls can flow down. It is

When the player grips the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 28 are guided to a shooting device (not shown) and hit with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the lever 21. It is launched into the game area 10 . The game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the shot game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10, and touches the game nails, the windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the movement direction. It should be noted that the shooting of game balls is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22 .

The upper tray 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the shooting device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for storing prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23 arranged close to the lower tray 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower tray 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower tray 29 are arranged below the lower tray 29. It drops into a box (not shown).

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the player keeps rotating the lever 21 at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 31 . On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32 .

A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided on the passage path of the left-handed game ball as accessories related to winning and judgment. It is In addition, on the passage path of the game ball hit to the right, there are the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 are provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters any one of the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the big winning hole 13, and the normal winning hole 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. and win a prize. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 28 or the lower tray 29 according to the place where the prize has been won. The game balls that did not win a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18. - 特許庁

A first starting port 11 as a first starting region is a starting port that is always open, and a second starting port 12 as a second starting region is where an electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory is operating. It is a starting port that is opened only when In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball wins by passing through a first start port 11 or when a game ball wins by passing through a second start port 12, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to a player. is executed, and the result of the determination is displayed on the display 4, which will be described later.

In the following description, the judgment executed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 11 is called "first special symbol judgment", and the condition that the game ball enters the second start port 12. The determination to be executed is called "second special symbol determination", and these determinations (lottery) are collectively called "special symbol determination (special symbol lottery)".

The big winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big winning opening 13 . The big winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined big winning symbol indicating that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "big winning" is stopped and displayed on the display device 4, the big winning game to open the big winning opening 13 by actuating the plate. is executed. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not performed.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to be able to change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which a pair of blade members closes the second start port 12 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second start port 12 is opened. ing.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second start port 12, although the prize ball is not paid out. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintain the open posture for a specified time and then return to the closed posture for a specified number of times. In this way, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas it is in a state in which the game ball can easily pass when the electric tulip 17 is operated. Become. In the following description, the determination (lottery) executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is called "normal symbol determination (normal symbol lottery)".

The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening from which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning of game balls. In addition, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, determination (lottery) is not performed even if a game ball wins the normal winning opening 14. - 特許庁

[Configuration example of effect means of pachinko game machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 includes a liquid crystal display device 5, a movable accessory 7, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25, an effect button 26, and an effect for performing various effects. A lever 71 is provided. The frame member 3 also incorporates a frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 5) not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible to the player. On the liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various display objects such as decorative patterns for notifying the judgment result of the special pattern judgment, characters and items for performing advance notice effects, and pending displays that are displayed as many as the special pattern judgment is suspended. is displayed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The movable accessory 7 is movable with respect to the game board 2, and is usually retracted to a retracted position between the screen and the game board 2 on the left and right sides of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Sometimes it is configured to advance to the front of the screen. A light-emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the movable accessory 7, and part or all of the movable accessory 7 emits light by causing the LED to emit light. The movable accessory 7 performs various effects by moving or emitting light based on the result of the special symbol determination.

The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects with light, such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color. The speaker 24 outputs musical pieces, voices, sound effects, etc. in synchronization with the display effects performed by the liquid crystal display device 5 to perform sound effects.

[Configuration Example of Operation Means of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with a performance button 26 and a performance key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The effect button 26 is configured to be able to protrude upward by a drive mechanism (not shown), and the upper surface thereof is configured to protrude more than usual when the effect using the effect button 26 is executed. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. In the pachinko game machine 1, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper portion of the frame member 3 is provided with a production lever 28 as an operating means operated by the player. The production lever 28 is for inputting operation information when the player pulls it downward or forward.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the posture of the production lever 28. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the effect lever 28 is composed of a grip portion that can be gripped by the player and a support portion for supporting the grip portion. The effect lever 28 is positioned between the "normal posture" (see FIG. 4A) in which the grip is located upward and the "pulled down posture" in which the grip is located downward (see FIG. 4C). It is configured such that the position of the gripping portion can be changed. For example, when the operation promotion effect is performed at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect described later, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the effect lever 28 is changed from the normal posture to the pull-down posture by the player's pull-down operation. In response, a jackpot notification effect is performed to notify the jackpot.

Also, for example, in various effects, a light-emitting element (not shown) such as an LED built in the effect lever 28 emits light. Furthermore, the production lever 28 may be used for a vibration production that vibrates the gripping portion by operating a motor built in the gripping portion.

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The indicator 4 mainly displays information about special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. It comprises a special symbol reservation display 43, a second special symbol reservation display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol reservation display 46, a game state display 47, a round display 48 and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 41 variably displays the symbol, and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Notification of judgment results. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 variably displays the symbol and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Notification of judgment results. On the first special symbol display device 41 and the second special symbol display device 42, as the determination symbol, a big hit symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit", or a determination result of the special symbol determination is "losing". ” is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol reservation display 43 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by variably displaying the symbol and then stop-displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol reservation display 46 displays the number of normal symbol determination pending. The game state display 47 displays the game state when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on. The round indicator 48 displays the number of rounds of the big winning game when the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42 stops displaying the big winning symbols.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called "second special symbol". are collectively called “special patterns”. Also, the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 45 are referred to as "normal symbols".

[Configuration of the control device of the pachinko game machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the control device of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a game control unit 100 for controlling the execution of determination (lottery), control of the jackpot game, command transmission processing to the effect control unit 130, and the like. A production control unit 130 that comprehensively controls production based on commands received from 100, an image sound control unit 140 that controls production by images and sounds, and a lamp control that controls production by various lamps and movable accessories 7. A portion 150 is provided. In addition to those shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a payout control section (not shown) for controlling the payout of prize balls.

[Configuration of game control unit 100]
The game control unit 100 has a CPU 101 , a ROM 102 and a RAM 103 . Based on the programs stored in the ROM 102, the CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the number of prize balls to be paid out, such as internal lottery and winning determination. The RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 101 executes the programs or as a work area for data processing.

The game control unit 100 includes a first start switch (SW) 111, a second start switch (SW) 112, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 113, a first gate switch (SW) 114, and a second gate switch (SW) 115. , a large winning slot switch (SW) 116, a large winning slot control section 117, a normal winning slot switch (SW) 118, and a display 4 are connected.

The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 11 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100 . The second starting port switch 112 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 12 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 . The electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 opens and closes the second starting port 12 by activating an electric solenoid connected to a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 in a drive-transmissible manner in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 . The second gate switch 115 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 . The big winning hole switch 116 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 13 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100 . The large winning opening control unit 117 opens and closes the large winning opening 13 by activating an electric solenoid connected to a plate that closes the large winning opening 13 in a drive-transmissible manner according to a control signal from the game control unit 100 . do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has entered the normal winning opening 14 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100 .

The CPU 101 of the game control unit 100, when a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 116, or the normal winning port switch 118, determines the location where the game ball has won. The payout control unit is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the information from the payout control unit.

The CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input, and uses the acquired random number to execute the first special symbol determination. Also, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, a special game is executed by opening and closing the big winning opening 13 via the big winning opening control section 117.例文帳に追加Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 is input, and uses the acquired random number to execute normal symbol determination. Then, when the result of the normal pattern determination is a hit, the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing part 113. - 特許庁

In addition, the CPU 101 transmits information indicating the start and stop of fluctuation of the special symbols to the effect control section 130 . In addition, the CPU 101 transmits to the effect control section 130 information about the variation setting of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the variation setting of the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. In addition, the CPU 101 transmits to the effect control unit 130 data indicating the shortening setting of the fluctuation time of the special symbols, information for notifying that the game ball has won the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, and the like. .

Also, the CPU 101 executes the following processing on the display device 4 . That is, when the CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination, the first special symbol display 41 variably displays the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. In addition, when the CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination, the second special symbol display 42 variably displays the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the normal symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the result of the determination.

In addition, the CPU 101 causes the first special symbol determination reserved number to be displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 43, the second special symbol determination reserved number to be displayed on the second special symbol reservation display 44, and the normal symbol determination. is displayed on the normal symbol reservation display 46. Further, the CPU 101 causes the game state display 47 to display the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, the CPU 101 causes the round indicator 48 to display the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

[Configuration of effect control unit 130]
Effect control unit 130 includes CPU 131 , ROM 132 , RAM 133 , and RTC (real time clock) 134 . The CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling effects based on programs stored in the ROM 132 . The RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 131 executes the programs or as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time.

The effect control section 130 sets the content of the effect based on the data indicating the result of the special symbol determination sent from the game control section 100 and the like. Effect control unit 130 transmits a command for instructing execution of the set effect content to image sound control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 .

The image sound control section 140 performs image display control of the liquid crystal display device 5 and sound output control of the speaker 24 . A configuration example of the image sound control unit 140 will be described later.

[Configuration of Lamp Control Unit 150]
The lamp control unit 150 has a CPU 151 , a ROM 152 and a RAM 153 . The CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the board lamp 25 , the frame lamp 37 , the production button 26 , the production lever 28 , and the movable accessory 7 based on the programs stored in the ROM 152 . The RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 151 executes the programs or as a work area for data processing.

The ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. The light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission pattern of each of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 25, and the movable accessory 7. FIG. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the movable accessory 7 .

The CPU 151 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the production control unit 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and controls the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the production button 26, and the production lever 28. , and the light emission of the light emitting element of the movable accessory 7 is controlled. In addition, the CPU 151 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and activates the movable accessory 7, the effect button 26, and the effect lever 28. It controls the drive of the motor for operation.

[Explanation of game state]
Here, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The game state includes a low-probability game state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is the first probability, and a high-probability game state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is a second probability higher than the first probability ( There is a probability variation gaming state).

The first and second probabilities, which are jackpot probabilities, may be fixed values. Also, the first probability and the second probability may change depending on the setting.

For example, the jackpot probability may be set to different probabilities by the hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when the game machine 1 is powered on, a set value switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game control board 100 is operated (for example, pressed), and a set value related to the jackpot probability is specified. (for example, any value from "1" to "6"). The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to different probabilities.

For example, the larger the value of the set value, the easier it is to win a jackpot, and the ratio between the second probability, which is the jackpot probability in the high-probability gaming state, and the first probability, which is the jackpot probability in the low-probability gaming state, is regardless of the set value. It can be fixed. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state is set to 1/220 when the set value is "1", set to 1/200 when the set value is "2", and the set value is When it is "3", it is set to 1/180. Also, the jackpot probability in the high-probability gaming state is set to 1/27.5 (=1/220×8 times) when the set value is "1", and the set value is "2". Sometimes it is set to 1/25 (=1/200×8 times), and when the set value is "3", it is set to 1/22.5 (=1/180×8 times).

A setting key, a setting change switch, and a setting value display device may be provided for setting the jackpot probability. The setting change switch may be provided exclusively for it, or may be used together with a RAM clear switch (a switch for initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100). When the setting change switch is used together with the RAM clear switch, for example, when the setting key is turned on (pressed down) and the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is turned on, the jackpot probability is set. When the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on and the RAM clear switch is turned off, the mode is shifted to a change mode, the setting key is turned off, and the setting key is turned off, and when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the RAM clear mode (the mode in which the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is initialized and the game machine is started) is entered, the setting key is turned off, And when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the power recovery mode (the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is not initialized, and the game machine is operated while maintaining the data at the time of the last power interruption) start mode). The game machine of this embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 5) of the game control unit 100 when the power is turned off, and the power is turned off for a certain period of time (for example, 24 hours). It is constructed so that data in the RAM 103 can be maintained even if it is cut off.

Further, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a non-assisting game state and an auxiliary game state. Auxiliary game state has a relatively high probability of being determined to be hit in normal symbol determination as compared with non-assistive game state (for example, 1/1.1). In addition, in the auxiliary game state, the opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively long when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination (for example, 1.8 seconds x 3 times), and the normal symbol fluctuation time is relatively long. is short (eg, 2 seconds). That is, in the auxiliary game state, when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, normal symbol determination is performed, and the probability of winning is relatively high, and the second start port 12 is opened 1.8 seconds x 3 times. A game ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Also, in the auxiliary game state, the fluctuation time of the special symbols is shortened compared to the non-assisted game state.

On the other hand, the non-assisting game state has a relatively low probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination compared to the auxiliary game state (eg, 1/50), and when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination The opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time), and the fluctuation time of the normal design is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-assisted game state, even if the normal symbol determination is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second start port 12 is 0.1 seconds × Since it is opened only once, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 is set to the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state, and is set to the auxiliary game state or the non-auxiliary game state.

The low-probability game state and non-assist game state are referred to as "normal game state", and the pachinko game machine 1 is initially set to the normal game state. In addition, the high probability game state and the auxiliary game state are referred to as "probability variation game state". In addition, the low probability game state and the auxiliary game state are referred to as "time saving game state".

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect is performed in one of three types of effect modes corresponding to the current game state, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal game state in the normal mode, when the game is controlled in the probability variable game state in the probability variable mode, when the game is controlled in the time saving game state time saving mode Each performance is performed in

It should be noted that the normal mode has a plurality of presentation modes (stages, eg, stage A, stage B, etc.). The stage itself does not indicate the reliability of the big win, and various effects (announcement effect, confirmation effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) described later can be executed in either normal mode of stage A or stage B.

[Main processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the main processing executed by the game control section 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100. As shown in FIG. The game control unit 100 repeats a series of processes shown in FIG. 6 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Execute. It should be noted that the processing of the game control unit 100, which will be described based on the flowcharts of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers (step S1). The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot pattern (type of jackpot) when the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot. Reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to select a variation pattern of a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more when the result of special symbol determination is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbols are variably displayed. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining winning or losing the normal symbol lottery. A jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number are generated, for example, by a random number generator each time the process of step S1 is performed.

After step S1, the CPU 101 executes a starting port switch (SW) process (step S2). In the starter switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first starter switch 111 or the second starter switch 112, and generates random numbers (jackpot random numbers, Symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers) are acquired at the time when the detection signal is input and stored in the RAM 103 . This starting port switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After step S2, the CPU 101 executes gate switch (SW) processing (step S3). In the gate switch process, the CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115, and when there is an input of the detection signal, acquires the normal symbol random number value updated in the process of step S1. is stored in the RAM 103. This gate switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After step S3, the CPU 101 executes special symbol processing (step S4). Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol processing, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and the big hit pattern in the case of a big hit. In addition, the CPU 101 executes special symbol determination using the random number acquired in the starting port switch process of step S2, and causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol. , the special symbols showing the result of the special symbol determination are stopped and displayed. The special symbol processing will be detailed later with reference to FIG.

Following step S4, the CPU 101 normally executes symbol processing (step S5). In the normal design process, the CPU 101 executes normal design determination using the normal design random number acquired in the gate switch process of step S3, and causes the normal design display device 45 to variably display the normal design as a result of the normal design determination. The normal symbol showing is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following step S5, the CPU 101 executes a big winning opening process of opening and closing the big winning opening 13 via the big winning opening control section 117 when the special symbol determination in the special symbol process of step S4 results in a big hit. (Step S6). The special winning opening process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After step S6, the CPU 101 executes electric tulip processing (step S7). In the electric tulip process, the CPU 101 operates the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 when winning the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol process of step S5. The motorized tulip process is described in greater detail below with reference to FIG.

Following step S7, the CPU 101 executes prize ball processing for controlling the number of winning game balls and the payout of prize balls according to the winning (step S8). Specifically, when the game ball wins in any of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14, the CPU 101 determines the number of prizes according to the winning place. pay out the ball. For example, the CPU 101 pays out 3 prize balls when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, and 15 prize balls when a game ball enters the big win hole 13. pay out.

After step S8, the CPU 101 executes output processing (step S9). In the output process of step S9, the CPU 101 transmits various commands set in the RAM 103 in the start opening switch process of step S2, the special symbol process of step S4, the big winning opening process of step S6, etc. to the effect control unit 130.

[Starting port switch processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the details of the starting opening switch process executed in the game control section 100 will be described. FIG. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the starting port switch process in step S2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the first starting port switch 111 is turned "ON" (whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 11). judge. When it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 has become "ON" (step S201: YES), the number of reservations U1 for the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the first special stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum pending number Umax1 (for example, 4) for symbol determination (step S202).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1 (step S202: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U1 by adding "1" (step S203). Then, the CPU 101 acquires the values of various random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated by the process of step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S204).

Here, by storing in the RAM 103 various random numbers obtained in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11, the first special symbol related to the reserved ball whose reserved number U1 is increased in step S203 is displayed. The right of judgment will be reserved. Although details will be described later, the reserved right to determine the first special symbol is digested in the special symbol processing of step S4, and the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The result of the first special symbol determination is notified.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 executes a preliminary determination process based on various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in step S204 (step S205). The pre-determination process in step S205 is a determination process for the reserved right of the first special symbol determination, and determines whether it is a big hit or not, a big hit pattern in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern, etc., and shows the determination result. This is a process of generating determination information. After that, the CPU 101 sets a hold command including the pre-determination information in the RAM 103 (step S206). The suspension command set in step S206 is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the effect control section 130 in the output process in step S9 of FIG. It should be noted that in the pre-determination process in step S205, the various random numbers acquired in step S204 may be directly generated as pre-determination information, and the pre-determination information may be included in the pending command.

If "NO" is determined in step S201, if "NO" is determined in step S202, or if the process of step S206 is executed, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S207. In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 112 is turned "ON" (whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 12). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 112 has become "ON" (step S207: YES), the number U2 of pending second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the second special stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum number of reserved symbols Umax2 (for example, 4) (step S208).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U2 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax2 (step S208: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U2 by adding "1" (step S209). Then, the CPU 101 acquires various random numbers (jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated in the process of step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S210).

Then, the CPU 101 uses various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 by the process of step S210 to execute the pre-determination process in the same manner as the process of step S205 (step S211), and stores the pending command including the pre-determination information in the RAM 103. set (step S212).

If "NO" is determined in step S207, if "NO" is determined in step S208, or if the process of step S212 is performed, the CPU 101 terminates the starting port switch process and the gate switch process. proceed to

[Gate switch processing by game control unit 100]
FIG. 8 is a detailed flow chart of gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 101 detects whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 or 115 is turned "ON") is input. It is determined whether or not the switch 114 or 115 is turned "ON" (step S301).

When the CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 or 115 has become "ON" (step S301: YES), the number of reservations G for normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the maximum number of reservations for normal symbol determination Gmax (for example, , 4) determine whether it is less than (step S302).

If the CPU 101 determines that the number G of reservations is less than the maximum number of reservations Gmax (step S302: YES), it updates the number of reservations G to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S303), A normal symbol random number used for symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM 103 (step S304). In addition, the prior determination processing may be performed in the same manner as in the above step S205 for the normal symbol random number stored in step S304, and the result of the prior determination processing may be transmitted to the effect control unit 130 as a normal symbol pending command. .

[Special symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. FIG. FIG. 9 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not a special game is in progress (a jackpot game is in progress), for example, based on information stored in the RAM 103 (step S401). When it is determined that the special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the CPU 101 terminates the special symbol processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being performed (step S401: NO), it determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (step S402). When it is determined that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S403 ), if it is determined to be "1" or more (step S403: YES), "1" is subtracted from the number of reservations U2, and only one reserved ball is consumed (step S404).

When the CPU 101 determines that the pending number U2 is not "1" or more (the second special symbol determination is not suspended) (step S403: NO), the pending number of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 It is determined whether or not U1 is "1" or more (step S405), and if it is determined to be "1" or more (step S405: YES), "1" is subtracted from the number of reservations U1 to set the number of reserved balls to 1 is digested (step S406). On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U1 is not equal to or greater than "1" in step S405 (step S405: NO), the CPU 101 sets the customer waiting command in the RAM 103, and ends the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

CPU101 performs big hit determination processing following the processing of step S404 or step S406 (step S407). The jackpot determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Jackpot determination process)
As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S431). Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit following the processing of step S404 in FIG. 9, the jackpot random number (the It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102 . Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit. In addition, when the game state is the high probability game state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the low probability game state. On the other hand, when judging whether or not the jackpot is achieved following the processing of step S406 in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 generates a jackpot random number related to the reserved ball from which the reserved number U1 is subtracted in the processing of step S406 (the RAM 103 in the processing of step S2). ) matches the winning value of the jackpot random number pre-stored in the ROM 102 or not. Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit.

Here, if the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit (step S431: YES), the CPU 101 performs symbol random number determination processing based on the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 together with the jackpot random number described above. (step S432). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches any random number assigned to each jackpot symbol stored in advance in the ROM 102. Then, the big hit pattern is determined. Then, the CPU 101 sets the determined jackpot symbol in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S433).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S431 that it is not a big hit (step S431: NO), the CPU 101 sets a losing symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a failure in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S434).

After the process of step S433 or the process of step S434, the CPU 101 ends the big hit determination process and returns the process to the special symbol process of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 9, following the jackpot determination process of step S407, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern setting process (step S408). The variation pattern setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a variable probability gaming flag, which will be described later, is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in a high probability gaming state (step S461). When the probability variation game flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag described later is ON, ie, whether or not the auxiliary game state (step S462). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF (step S462: NO), the CPU 101 sets the normal table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S463). When the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S462: YES), the CPU 101 sets a working hours table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S464).

On the other hand, when the probability variation gaming flag is ON (step S461: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S466).

The variation pattern table is a table that defines the conditions for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Each fluctuation pattern table contains a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit, and when it is a loss and there is no reach (predetermined fluctuation time using a reach random number (For example, when it is not decided to select a variation pattern of 13 seconds or more), the loss variation pattern (no reach) selected when there is a reach (for example, a predetermined variation time using a reach random number) 13 seconds) includes the reach variation pattern that is selected when it is determined to select a variation pattern of more than ). For example, the jackpot variation pattern included in the normal table includes variation patterns with variation times of 25 seconds, 60 seconds, 100 seconds, 120 seconds, etc., and the reach variation pattern included in the normal table has a variation time of 22 seconds. , 57 seconds, 92 seconds, and 112 seconds. In addition, there are fluctuation patterns with fluctuation times of 8 seconds, 12 seconds, and the like, as loss fluctuation patterns included in the normal table. In addition, in the time saving table and the probability variation table, there is a variation pattern (for example, variation time of 2 seconds) that is shorter than the loss variation pattern in the normal table as a loss variation pattern. An example of the variation pattern table of the normal table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18A to 18C.

CPU101 judges whether the result of big-hit determination of step S407 was a loss following the process of step S463, step S464, or step S465 (step S466). If the result of this big win determination is not a loss, that is, if it is a big win (step S466: NO), the CPU 101 advances the process to the next step 468. FIG.

When it is determined that the result of the big hit determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the CPU 101 performs reach random number determination processing (step S467). In the reach random number determination process, the CPU 101 determines whether or not to select a reach variation pattern with a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or longer based on the acquired reach random number. Then, CPU 101 executes the process of step S468 following the process of step S467.

In step S468, the CPU 101 performs variation pattern random number determination processing. Specifically, the CPU 101 uses the set variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. More specifically, the CPU 101 determines a variation pattern in which the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches the value set for each variation pattern included in the set variation pattern table.

In this way, the CPU 101 determines a special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number obtained in step S2 and the variation pattern table set in step S463, step S464, or step S465. The determined variation pattern is set in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S469). After the processing of step S469, the CPU 101 ends the variation pattern setting processing shown in FIG. 11, and advances the processing after step S409 in FIG.

Returning to FIG. 9, following the process of step S408, the CPU 101 indicates the pattern setting information set in the process of step S407, the setting information of the variation pattern set in the process of step S408, and the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A variation start command including information is generated and set in the RAM 103 (step S409). This variation start command is a command for instructing execution of an effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Following the process of step S409, the CPU 101 starts variable display of special symbols based on the setting information included in the variable start command set in the process of step S409 (step S410), and measures the variable time. start (step S411). It should be noted that, when the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, the variable display of the special symbols is performed using the second special symbol display 42, following the processing of step S406. When performed, the first special symbol display 41 is used.

When the CPU 101 determines “YES” in the process of step S402 or executes the process of step S411, the CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S408 is calculated from the start of measurement of the fluctuation time in step S411. It is determined whether or not time has passed (step S412).

When the CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), it sets a fluctuation stop command for notifying that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped in the RAM 103 (step S413), and in the process of step S410 The variable display of the started special symbols is terminated (step S414), and the measured variable time is reset (step S415). Thereby, in the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42, a symbol (a big winning symbol or a losing symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the big winning determination process of step S407 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol determination is performed. Results are reported. In addition, the fluctuation stop command set by the process of step S413 is transmitted to the production|presentation control part 130 by performing the output process of FIG.6 S9.

CPU101 performs a process during a stop after the process of step S415 (step S416). The details of the processing during suspension will be described later.

If "YES" is determined in step S401, if "NO" is determined in step S405, if "NO" is determined in step S412, or if the process of step S416 is performed, the CPU 101 After finishing the special design process, the normal design process of step S5 in FIG. 6 is executed.

[Stopping process by game control unit 100]
Next, the stop processing in step S416 of FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart showing the process during stop in step S416 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a big win based on the result of the big win determination process of step S407 (step S480). And CPU101 sets the big-hit game flag memorize|stored in RAM103 to "ON", when it determines with a big-hit (step S480: YES) (step S481).

Following the processing of step S481, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag and probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S482). Following the processing of step S482, CPU 101 starts opening (step S483) and sets an opening command in RAM 103 (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is to start and a jackpot effect during the jackpot game. It is transmitted to the production control unit 130 by being executed.

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485). When it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), "1" is subtracted from the auxiliary game residual number J stored in the RAM 103, and the J is updated (step S486). . The auxiliary game residual number J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols for which the auxiliary game state is maintained (the number of executions of special symbol determination), and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed. . Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the process of step S486, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487). When determining that the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is not "0" (step S487: NO ), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When it is determined that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the high probability game residual count X stored in the RAM 103, and updates the X. (Step S490). The high-probability game residual count X indicates the remaining number of times special symbol determination is performed in the high-probability game state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

Following the process of step S490, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game residual count X is "0" (step S491). When it is determined that the high probability game residual number X is "0" (step S491: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "OFF" (step S492).

When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or the high probability game residual number X is " 0” (step S491: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the processing during stop of FIG.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the normal symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S501). The auxiliary flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the result of normal symbol determination is a hit, and is a flag that indicates whether or not the electric tulip 17 is being operated during a winning game. The electric tulip 17 operates in a predetermined pattern when the result of the normal symbol determination is hit. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 differs depending on whether the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary game state (whether the auxiliary game flag is ON). When determining that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display 45 (step S502), When it is determined that the variable display of normal symbols is not in progress (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number G of normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S503). If it is determined that the number G of reservations is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S503: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations G is equal to or greater than "1" (step S503: YES), it updates the number of reservations G to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S504), and executes normal symbol random number determination processing. (Step S505). Specifically, the normal symbol random number obtained in the process of step S3 in response to the game ball passing through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is the winning value of the normal symbol random number stored in the ROM 102. , it is determined whether or not the result of normal symbol determination is winning (step S506). In the auxiliary game state, the winning value of the normal symbol random number is set more than in the non-assisted game state, and in the auxiliary game state, the result of the normal symbol determination is hit. The probability of becoming is higher than the non-assisted game state.

When the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is not winning (step S506: NO), it sets a losing symbol in the RAM 103 (step S507).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is winning (step S506: YES), the CPU 101 sets the winning symbol in the RAM 103 (step S508).

Following the processing of step S507 or the processing of step S508, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game state is set based on whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON (step S509).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary game state (step S509: NO), it sets the normal symbol fluctuation time, which is the time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 45, to, for example, 25 seconds (step S510). Conversely, when it is determined that it is in the auxiliary game state (step S509: YES), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short value, for example, 2 seconds (step S511). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S510 or step S511 is temporarily stored in the RAM103.

Following the processing of step S510 or step S511, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display device 45 to start variable display of normal symbols (step S512), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variable display (step S513). .

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed on the normal symbol display 45 (step S502: YES), it determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbols (step S516). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time starting to be measured by the process of step S513 reaches the normal design fluctuation time set in the process of step S512 or step S513, the normal design fluctuation display It is determined whether or not the end timing has come. If it is determined that the end timing has not come (step S516: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When the CPU 101 determines that it is time to end the variation display of the normal symbols (step S516: YES), the normal symbol display device 45 terminates the variation display of the normal symbols (step S517). Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to stop and display the symbol set in the process of step S507 or step S508. As a result, the result of normal symbol determination is notified.

Following the process of step S517, the CPU 101 resets the elapsed time for which measurement was started by the process of step S515 (step S518). Then, similarly to the above step S506, it is determined whether or not the result of normal design determination is a hit (step S519), and if it is determined to be a hit (step S519: YES), the auxiliary flag is set to "ON". Set (step S520). The electric tulip 17 is operated by setting the auxiliary flag to "ON" and performing an electric tulip process, which will be described later.

When the process of step S520 is performed, when it determines with NO by the process of step S516, or when it determines with NO by the process of step S519, CPU101 normally complete|finishes the design process of FIG.

In the non-assisted game state, the second starting port 12 is long open (eg, open for 5.6 seconds), and the second starting port 12 is short open (eg, open for 0.1 seconds). It can be hit and miss.

[Large Winning Opening Process by Game Control Unit 100]
Next, details of the big winning opening process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart showing the big winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the special game flag (jackpot game flag) is ON (step S601). When the special game flag is ON (step S601: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S602). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game started in step S483 is in the process of opening.

If it is during the opening (step S602: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time has passed (step S603). The opening time varies depending on the jackpot pattern. If the opening time has passed (step S603: YES), the CPU 101 sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and sets the value of Rmax, The opening pattern (opening time, number of openings, interval time, etc.) of the big winning opening 13 is set (step S604).

Here, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot pattern. Although the details will be described later, the number of rounds differs depending on the jackpot pattern, and the CPU 101 sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot pattern.

After step S604, the CPU 101 adds "1" to R and stores it in the RAM 103 (step S605). Next, the CPU 101 starts opening control of the big winning opening 13 based on the opening pattern set in step S604 (step S606), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the RAM 103 (step S607). After the process of step S607, the CPU 101 next executes the process of step S611.

On the other hand, if it is not during the opening (step S602: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether it is during the ending (step S608). If the ending is in progress (step S608: YES), the CPU 101 next executes the process of step S617. If it is not in the ending (step S608: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether it is in the interval between the round games (step S609). If it is during the interval (step S609: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval time has passed (step S610). Execute. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S610: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the big winning opening process.

On the other hand, if it is not during the interval (step S609: NO), that is, if it is during the round game, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S611). If the round end condition is not met (step S611: NO), the CPU 101 ends the big winning opening process.

For example, the round end condition of the long opening round game to be described later is that, for example, 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening control of the large winning opening of this round was started in step S606, or that the large opening round game in step S606 The number of winning prizes of the game balls into the big prize winning port after starting the opening control of the winning prize port has reached a predetermined value. The CPU 101 determines that the round end condition is satisfied when either one of these two conditions is satisfied.

When the round end condition is satisfied (step S611: YES), the CPU 101 ends the opening control of the big winning opening in this round (step S612). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets a round end command (step S613). This round end command is transmitted to the effect control section 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 determines whether or not R is equal to Rmax (step S614). That is, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S604.

When determining that R is not equal to Rmax (step S614: NO), the CPU 101 starts measuring the interval time (step S615), and then ends the big winning opening process.

When determining that R is equal to Rmax (step S614: YES), the CPU 101 starts ending (step S616) and sets an ending command in the RAM 103 (step S617).

When the CPU 101 has performed the process of step S617 or determines YES in the process of step S608, it determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S616 (step S618). If the ending time has passed (step S618: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current special game is a jackpot game (step S619). When the jackpot game flag is ON, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process (step S620). Details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S620 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S619, the CPU 101 sets the special game flag (jackpot game flag) to OFF (step S621).

If NO is determined in the process of step S601, if NO is determined in the process of step S611, if NO is determined in the process of step S618, if NO is determined in the process of step S610, NO is determined in the process of step S603. When it is determined that the process of step S615 is executed, or when the process of step S621 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the big winning opening process shown in FIG.

[Game State Setting Processing by Game Control Unit 100]
Next, the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG. 14 will be described. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of the current jackpot is a high-probability jackpot accompanied by transition to a high-probability gaming state (step S630). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a high-probability jackpot based on the symbols set in the jackpot determination process. If it is a high probability jackpot (step S630: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation game flag to ON (step S631), and sets Xmax to the high probability game residual number X (step S632). Xmax is a predetermined value, and a very large value such as 10000 is set as Xmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set to X, the game is practically controlled in a high-probability game state until the next big win.

When the process of step S632 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S630, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current big win is a big win accompanied by transition to the auxiliary game state (step S633). When it determines with YES at step S633, CPU101 sets an auxiliary game flag to ON (step S634). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets the value of the auxiliary game remaining number J according to the pattern set in the big hit determination process (step S635).

When the process of step S635 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S633, the CPU 101 terminates the game state setting process shown in FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the electric tulip processing in step S7 of FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip processing of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701). When determining that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the CPU 101 terminates the electric tulip processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), it determines whether the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702). When it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not in operation (step S702: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON, thereby determining whether or not the auxiliary game state (step S703).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary game state (step S703: NO), for example, it sets an operation pattern in the RAM 103 to perform the operation of opening the second starting port 12 for 0.1 seconds once (step S704).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the CPU 101 is in the auxiliary game state (step S703: YES), the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 is, for example, an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 1.8 seconds is performed three times. It is set in the RAM 103 (step S705).

After setting the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 in step S704 or S705, the CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 to start operating the electric tulip 17 according to the set operation pattern (step S706).

When the CPU 101 executes the process of step S706 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S706 has been completed. (step S707). When determining that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S707: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S708).

If NO is determined in the process of step S701, if NO is determined in the process of step S707, or if the process of step S708 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

Next, the jackpot symbols selected when the result of the special game determination is jackpot will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the details of the jackpot symbols selected according to the winning to each starting port, and is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol.

As shown in FIG. 17, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and becomes a big hit, one of the big win patterns Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 41. Then, a jackpot game (a kind of special game) corresponding to each jackpot pattern is performed. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 12 and results in a big hit, one of the big win patterns Z4 to Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display device 42, and the respective big win patterns are displayed. A jackpot game (a kind of special game) according to is performed.

Specifically, when a jackpot is determined based on the winning to the first start port 11, the jackpot pattern Z1 is selected at a rate of 10%, and the jackpot pattern Z2 is selected at a rate of 50%. , the jackpot pattern Z3 is selected at a rate of 40%.

When the jackpot pattern Z1 is selected, a predetermined round end condition (for example, until the number of game balls entering the jackpot 13 reaches 10, or after the jackpot 13 is opened) Until 29.5 seconds have elapsed), a long opening round game in which the big winning opening 13 is opened is performed 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as “R”)). For example, in a 10R jackpot game, about 1500 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the jackpot pattern Z2 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed as the jackpot game. After the jackpot pattern Z1 or the jackpot pattern Z2 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probability variable game state (high probability game state and auxiliary game state), and substantially the probability variable game until the next jackpot. condition continues.

The jackpot by the jackpot pattern Z1 is called "10R probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot by the jackpot pattern Z2 is called "4R probability variable jackpot".

Further, when the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed. After the jackpot pattern Z3 is selected and the jackpot game is played, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a low-probability game state and an auxiliary game state (time-saving game state). The time-saving game state continues until the special symbols are varied 100 times, and when the 100th special symbol variation is completed, the game machine 1 is returned to the normal game state. Incidentally, the big win by the big win pattern Z3 may be called "4R normal big win".

On the other hand, when it is judged to be a jackpot based on the winning to the second starting port 12, the jackpot pattern Z4 is selected at a rate of 50%, the jackpot pattern Z5 is selected at a rate of 10%, and the jackpot is selected at a rate of 40%. Symbol Z6 is selected.

When the jackpot pattern Z4 or Z5 is selected, after the jackpot game, the state shifts to the variable probability game state. The variable probability game state is substantially continued until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot pattern Z6 is selected, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game, and the time-saving game state continues until the special pattern changes 100 times.

The jackpot pattern Z4 is a pattern indicating the 10R probability variable jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 10R long open round game is performed. The jackpot pattern Z5 is a pattern indicating the 4R probability variable jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 4R long open round game is performed. Also, the jackpot pattern Z6 is a pattern indicating a 4R normal jackpot.

(Explanation of fluctuation production and reach production)
Here, the variable effect and the ready-to-win effect will be described. "Variation production" is a production performed during the fluctuation of the special design (first special design or second special design), is started according to the start of the fluctuation of the special design, and ends according to the end of the fluctuation of the special design. It is a production that The variable effects include effects using decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, effects using other images, effects using sounds output from the speaker 24, effects using the movable accessories 7, and board lamps. 25, production using the frame lamp 37, production using the production button 26, and production using the production lever 28 are included.

The "ready-to-win effect" is an effect using decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big win. Although the details will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 5 displays decorative symbols that change according to the start of the variation of the special symbols and stop according to the end of the variation of the special symbols. The decorative design is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display of the special design being executed. Whether the result of the special design determination is a big hit or a loss is reported depending on the mode of stopping the decorative design. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 5 displays three decoration patterns of left, middle, and right. Each decorative pattern is, for example, an image including numbers "1" to "9" and character images corresponding to the numbers. Three decorative patterns start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, and when three decorative patterns of the same kind stop together (for example, "777" or "444"), a big hit is announced. . In addition, the state in which three decorative patterns of the same kind are aligned is called "Zorome". On the other hand, if the three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned and the game stops, it means that a failure has been reported. The ready-to-win effect is a effect that makes the player expect that three decorative patterns of the same kind are arranged.

For example, the ready-to-win production is a production in which decorative patterns of the same type stop on the left and right and the decorative patterns fluctuate in the middle area. It is an expected performance.

In this embodiment, there are four types of ready-to-win effects: a normal ready-to-win effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N reach"), an SP ready-to-win effect, an SPSP ready-to-win effect, and a full rotation ready-to-win effect. The N-reach effect is the effect with the lowest possibility (also called degree of expectation or degree of reliability) of a subsequent big win among the plurality of ready-to-win effects. For example, the degree of expectation of the N-reach effect is 0.1% or less. In the present embodiment, there are two N-reach effects A and B as the N-reach effects, and depending on the N-reach effects, the degree of expectation for a big hit and the effect time also differ. It is configured such that the longer the performance time of the N-reach performance, the higher the degree of expectation.

The SP reach effect is a effect with a higher degree of expectation than the N reach effect, and is a reach effect with a longer effect time than the N reach effect. For example, the expected degree of SP reach effect is 5 to 10%. In this embodiment, there are three types of SP ready-to-win effects, namely, SP ready-to-win effects A to C, and depending on the SP ready-to-win effects, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs, and the effect time also differs. It is configured such that the longer the performance time of the SP reach performance, the higher the degree of expectation.

The SPSP ready-to-win effect is an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the SP ready-to-win effect, and is a ready-to-win effect with a longer effect time than the SP ready-to-win effect. For example, the expected degree of SPSP reach effect is 30 to 50%. In this embodiment, there are three types of SPSP ready-to-win effects A to C, and depending on the SPSP ready-to-win effects, the degree of expectation for a big win and the effect time also differ. It is configured such that the longer the effect time of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the higher the expectation.

The all-rotation reach is a reach performance with an expectation of 100% (that is, a big hit is confirmed). Full-rotation reach is, for example, a state in which three decorative patterns of the same kind are arranged in the horizontal direction, and is an effect that fluctuates in the vertical direction. For example, three decorative patterns "333" move from the upper area to the lower area of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and then three decorative patterns "444" move from the upper area to the lower area of the screen. In the all-rotation reach, even if any kind of decorative pattern finally stops, three decorative patterns of the same kind stop together, resulting in a big win.

(Example of fluctuation pattern)
Next, an example of a variation pattern table for selecting variation patterns will be described. 18A to 18C are diagrams showing examples of variation pattern tables used, for example, in the normal game state. FIG. 18A is a table used when the result of special symbol determination is a big win, and is a diagram showing an example of a big win variation pattern table used for selecting a big win variation pattern. FIG. 18B is a table used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, and a reach random number is used to select a variation time of a predetermined time or more, and is used to select a reach variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach fluctuation pattern table used. FIG. 18C is a table used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, and a reach random number is used to determine that the variation time of a predetermined time or more is not selected, and is used to select a loss variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the loss variation pattern table used for.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the jackpot variation pattern table includes jackpot variation patterns OP1-1 (variation time of 20 seconds) and OP1-2 (variation time of 25 seconds). The jackpot variation patterns OP1-1 and OP1-2 are each selected at a rate of 0.5%. When the big hit variation pattern OP1-1 or OP1-2 is selected, the variation effect including the normal reach effect is performed by the effect control unit 130 as the ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, after three decorative patterns start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, the same kind of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides, and the normal reach effect A is performed. done.

When a big hit variation pattern OP1-2 is selected, after three decorative patterns start to fluctuate in accordance with the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, the same kind of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides to perform a normal ready-to-win performance B.例文帳に追加

In addition, before (or after) the N-reach production is started, a pseudo-variation production (pseudo-continuation) may be performed. Here, the pseudo-continuation is an effect in which the three decorative symbols temporarily stop on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 and change again. Temporary stop is a state in which the three decorative symbols are not completely stopped and are slightly fluctuating (for example, swinging up and down). A case where the three decorative patterns do not change again is sometimes called "no pseudo". Also, when the three decorative patterns are re-changed one or more times, the first re-change is "pseudo 2", the second re-change is "pseudo 3", and the third re-change is "pseudo 4". There is For example, one or a plurality of times of pseudo-fluctuation effect (re-fluctuation) may be performed before the ready-to-win is established (the same kind of decorative symbols stop on the left and right), and then the N-reach effect may be started. Alternatively, the ready-to-win state may be established without performing the pseudo-variation effect, and then the pseudo-variable effect may be performed one or more times, and the ready-to-win state may be established again to start the N-reach effect. In addition, one or a plurality of times of pseudo-variation performance may be performed before ready-to-win is established, then ready-to-win may be established, and then one or more times of pseudo-variation performance may be performed, and ready-to-win may be established again.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18A, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table includes jackpot fluctuation patterns OP2-1 (variation time 40 seconds), OP2-2 (variation time 50 seconds), and OP2-3 (variation time 60 seconds). ) and are included. The jackpot variation patterns OP2-1, OP2-2, and OP2-3 are selected at rates of 1%, 3%, and 5%, respectively. When any one of the big hit variation patterns OP2-1 to OP2-3 is selected, the variation effect including the N reach effect and the SP reach effect is performed by the effect control unit 130 as the ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP2-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach performance is performed, and then the SP reach performance A is performed. . Further, when the big winning variation pattern OP2-2 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect B is performed. In addition, when the big winning variation pattern OP2-3 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary in accordance with the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach performance is performed, and then the SP reach performance C is performed.

The jackpot variation pattern table includes jackpot variation patterns OP3-1 (variation time 100 seconds), OP3-2 (variation time 110 seconds), and OP3-3 (variation time 120 seconds). The jackpot variation patterns OP3-1, OP3-2 and OP3-3 are selected at a rate of 10%, 15% and 24% respectively. When any one of the big hit variation patterns OP3-1 to OP3-3 is selected, the variation performance including the N reach performance, SP reach performance and SPSP reach performance is performed by the performance control unit 130 as the ready-to-win performance.

Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP3-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary in response to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. Furthermore, after that, the SPSP ready-to-win effect A is performed. In addition, when the big hit variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach performance is performed, then the SP reach performance is performed, and then, The SPSP reach performance B is performed. In addition, when the big hit variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then, The SPSP reach performance C is performed.

Also, the jackpot variation pattern table includes jackpot variation patterns OP4-1 (variation time 80 seconds), OP4-2 (variation time 90 seconds) and OP4-3 (variation time 100 seconds). The jackpot variation patterns OP4-1, OP4-2 and OP4-3 are selected at a rate of 8%, 13% and 18% respectively. When any one of the big hit variation patterns OP4-1 to OP4-3 is selected, the variation performance including the N reach performance and the SPSP reach performance is performed by the performance control unit 130 as the ready-to-win performance.

Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP4-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach A effect is performed. . Further, when the big hit variation pattern OP4-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect B is performed. In addition, when the big hit variation pattern OP4-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary in response to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect C is performed.

Also, the jackpot variation pattern table includes a jackpot variation pattern OP5 (variation time: 150 seconds). The big hit variation pattern OP5 is selected at a rate of 1%. When the big hit variation pattern OP5 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variable effect including a full-rotation ready-to-win effect as a ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, the reach variation pattern table includes reach variation patterns HP1-1 (variation time of 17 seconds) and HP1-2 (variation time of 22 seconds). Reach variation patterns HP1-1 and HP1-2 are selected at a rate of 30% and 20%, respectively. When the reach variation pattern HP1-1 or HP1-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a change effect including a normal reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win variation pattern HP1-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary in accordance with the start of variation of the special symbols, and the normal ready-to-win effect A is performed. Further, when the ready-to-win fluctuation pattern HP1-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to change in accordance with the start of fluctuation of the special symbols, and the normal ready-to-win production B is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, the reach variation pattern table includes variation patterns HP2-1 (variation time 37 seconds), HP2-2 (variation time 47 seconds), and HP2-3 (variation time 57 seconds). and are included. The reach variation patterns HP2-1, HP2-2, and HP2-3 are selected at rates of 10%, 8%, and 7%, respectively. When any one of the reach variation patterns HP2-1 to HP2-3 is selected, the variation effect including the N reach effect and the SP reach effect is performed by the effect control unit 130 as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win variation pattern HP2-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary in accordance with the start of variation in the special symbols, N-reach performance is performed, and then SP-ready-to-win performance A is performed. . In addition, when the ready-to-win variation pattern HP2-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary in response to the start of variation in the special symbols, the N-reach performance is performed, and then the SP-ready-to-win performance B is performed. Further, when the ready-to-win variation pattern HP2-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N-ready-to-win effect is performed, and then the SP ready-to-win effect C is performed.

The reach variation pattern table includes reach variation patterns HP3-1 (variation time 92 seconds), HP3-2 (variation time 102 seconds), and HP3-3 (variation time 112 seconds). The reach variation patterns HP3-1, HP3-2, and HP3-3 are selected at rates of 5%, 3%, and 2%, respectively. When one of the reach variation patterns HP3-1 to HP3-3 is selected, the variation performance including the N reach performance, the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance is performed by the performance control unit 130 as the reach performance.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win variation pattern HP3-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to change in accordance with the start of variation of the special symbols, the N-reach effect is performed, and then the SP ready-to-win effect is performed. Furthermore, after that, the SPSP ready-to-win effect A is performed. Further, when the ready-to-reach variation pattern HP3-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N-reach performance is performed, and then the SP-ready-to-win performance is performed, and then, The SPSP reach performance B is performed. In addition, when the ready-to-reach variation pattern HP3-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N-reach performance is performed, then the SP-ready-to-win performance is performed, and then, The SPSP reach performance C is performed.

The reach variation pattern table includes reach variation patterns HP4-1 (variation time 72 seconds), HP4-2 (variation time 82 seconds), and HP4-3 (variation time 92 seconds). Reach variation patterns HP4-1, HP4-2, and HP4-3 are selected at rates of 7%, 5%, and 3%, respectively. When one of the reach variation patterns HP4-1 to HP4-3 is selected, the variation performance including the N reach performance and the SPSP reach performance is performed by the performance control unit 130 as the reach performance.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win fluctuation pattern HP4-1 is selected, the three decorative patterns start to change in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbols, the N-ready-to-win production is performed, and then the SPSP ready-to-win production A is performed. . Further, when the ready-to-win variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N-ready-to-win effect is performed, and then the SPSP ready-to-win effect B is performed. In addition, when the ready-to-win variation pattern HP4-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N-ready-to-win effect is performed, and then the SPSP ready-to-win effect C is performed.

The reach variation pattern table does not include the variation pattern (OP5 above) in which all-rotation reach is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, the losing variation pattern table includes a losing variation pattern HP5-1 (variation time 8 seconds) selected when the number of reservations (U1) of the first special symbol determination is 2 or less. , HP5-2 (variation time 12 seconds). If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, and if there is no reach (if it is not determined to select a variation pattern with a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) using a reach random number), the loss variation pattern HP5- 1 is selected with a probability of 80%, and the losing variation pattern HP5-2 is selected with a probability of 20%. In addition, the losing variation pattern table includes a losing variation pattern HP5-3 (variation time 3 seconds) selected when the number of reservations (U1) of the first special symbol determination is 3 or more. When the number of reservations is 3 or more, the losing variation pattern HP5-3 is selected at a rate of 100%.

As described above, when it is determined as a big hit, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is likely to be performed, and the N-reach effect is difficult to be performed. Further, when it is determined that the game is lost, it is difficult to perform the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and it is easy to perform the N-reach effect. Therefore, when the SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed, the possibility of winning a big win is relatively high after that, and when the N-reach performance is performed, the possibility of winning a big win after that is relatively low.

Further, regarding a plurality of SP reach performances, in the case of a big win, the SP reach performances C, B, and A are likely to be executed in this order, and in the case of a loss, the SP reach performances A, B, and C are likely to be executed in this order. there is Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of SP reach performance A, B, and C. Further, regarding a plurality of SPSP ready-to-win performances, in the case of a big win, SPSP ready-to-win performances C, B, and A are likely to be executed in this order, and in the case of losing, SPSP ready-to-win performances A, B, and C are more likely to be executed in this order. there is Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of SPSP ready-to-win effects A, B, and C.

It should be noted that there may be a plurality of special symbol variation patterns (variation times) other than those shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B. For example, each ready-to-win effect may have a variation pattern including a pseudo-run and a variation pattern not including a pseudo-run. In this case, the selection rate of each variation pattern is set so that the greater the number of pseudo-runs (the number of re-variation), the higher the expectation of a big win. For example, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach effect A, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach effect B, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach effect C, pseudo 3 and SP reach effect A There may be a variation pattern including, a variation pattern including pseudo 3 and SP reach effect B, and a variation pattern including pseudo 3 and SP reach effect C. Also, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SPSP reach effect A, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SPSP reach effect B, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SPSP reach effect C, pseudo 3 and SPSP reach effect A There may be a variation pattern including, a variation pattern including pseudo 3 and SPSP ready-to-win effect B, and a variation pattern including pseudo 3 and SPSP ready-to-win effect C.

Also, as the big hit variation pattern and the ready-to-win variation pattern, there may be a variation pattern in which an N-ready to-win effect and an SPSP ready-to-win effect not including the SP ready-to-win effect are performed. Further, as the big hit variation pattern, there may be a variation pattern in which none of the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SP SP reach effect is performed. When such a variation pattern is selected, a big win is suddenly notified without performing a ready-to-win effect.

(Production in gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment)
Next, the outline of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.

(Production by losing variation pattern)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the flow of the variation of the special symbols and the accompanying effect when the losing variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbols. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a specific example of the effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 5 when the losing variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 20(A), when the special symbols are statically displayed, the decorative symbols 51 are statically displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 . The decorative design 51 includes a left decorative design 51a in the left area, a middle decorative design 51b in the middle area, and a right decorative design 51c in the right area. Each of the decorative designs 51a, 51b, and 51c includes an image of a number (eg, "2" in the left decorative design) and a predetermined image corresponding to the number (eg, an image of a character or an image of a specific person, not shown). is a combined image. A normal background image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 as a background image. The background image is an image that serves as the background of the image displayed on the screen, and is placed in the farthest layer of the screen. Images other than the background image (for example, the decorative pattern 51, the reserved display, the fourth pattern, etc.) are arranged in a layer on the front side of the background image. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, images are managed in a plurality of layers, and images arranged in the front layer are preferentially displayed on the screen. A pending display 52 is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 . The suspension display 52 is an image showing the suspension of the special symbol determination right. For example, up to four images are displayed as images showing the suspension of the first special symbol determination. FIG. 20(A) shows a state in which three first special symbol determinations are suspended, and a suspended display 521, a suspended display 522, and a suspended display 523 are displayed. In addition, a variable display 53 showing the current variation of the special symbol is displayed to the right of the pending display 521 . The changing display 53 is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the current change in the special symbol.

Also, for example, a fourth pattern 55 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. The 4th design 55 is a design for production which fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the 1st special design, and stops according to the stop of the 1st special design. Although the fourth symbol 55 is assumed to be a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, a fourth symbol (not shown) corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed on the screen.

When the game ball wins, for example, the first starting port 11 during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the right of special symbol determination is reserved. When the right of special symbol determination is reserved, a reserved display 52 is additionally displayed. When winning the first starting port 11, it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. Based on the result of this preliminary determination, the display form of the additionally displayed pending display 52 may be displayed in a display form different from usual. For example, the display mode of the pending display 52 includes white, blue, green, red, and gold, and is normally displayed in "white". The pending display 52 is displayed in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold, and the display mode of the pending display 52 is such that the degree of expectation (the possibility of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol determination related to the pending display 52) is high. is determined. For example, the expectation level of “blue” in the pending display 52 is 3%, the expectation level of “green” is 15%, the expectation level of “red” is 35%, and the expectation level of “gold” is 65%. %.

A predetermined winning sound may be output from the speaker 24 when the pending display 52 is additionally displayed. For example, when the pending display 52 is displayed in normal "white", the first prize winning sound is output, and when the pending display 52 is displayed in "blue", the second winning sound is output, A third winning sound may be output when the pending display 52 is displayed in "green". Further, when the pending display 52 is displayed in "red", the fourth winning sound may be output, and when the pending display 52 is displayed in "gold", the fifth winning sound may be output. . When the second to fifth winning sounds indicating that the expectation level of the pending display 52 is higher than normal are output, they may be output with a louder volume than the first winning sound.

In addition, when the pending display 52 is displayed in the normal "white", the winning sound is not output, and when it is displayed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal "white", depending on the display mode different winning sounds may be output. In addition, not only at the time of winning the starting gate, but after winning the starting gate, the display mode of the pending display 52 changes to any one of the plurality of display modes in the next and subsequent special symbol variations, and the display mode changes. The winning sound may be output when the is changed.

For example, the pending display 52 is additionally displayed in normal "white" according to the winning of the starting port, and the "white" pending display 52 changes to "blue" during the next and subsequent special symbol changes. good too. Such an effect in which the pending display 52 changes is called a "suspended change effect". When the pending change effect is executed, a sound corresponding to the changing color of the pending display 52 (the same sound as the winning sound) is output. Note that when the hold change effect is executed, a sound different from the winning sound may be output. Further, the suspension change effect may be performed multiple times for one suspension display 52 . For example, the pending display 52 may be displayed in "white" at the time of winning, then change to "blue", then change to "green", and then change to "red". Further, the holding change effect may be performed multiple times during one variation of the special symbol, or may be performed multiple times during the variation of the plurality of special symbols.

Further, during the variation of the special symbol, the display 53 during variation corresponding to the variation may change to a mode with a higher degree of expectation. The effect in which the display 53 during fluctuation changes is referred to as "display change effect during fluctuation". When the changing display changing effect is executed, a sound (the same sound as the winning sound) corresponding to the changing color of the changing display 53 is output. It should be noted that a sound different from the winning sound may be output when the display change effect during fluctuation is executed. In addition, the display change effect during fluctuation may be performed multiple times during the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Here, when the display 53 during fluctuation is in a predetermined display mode (for example, red), in the fluctuation, for example, SPSP ready-to-win effect (effect with higher expectation than SP ready-to-win effect) may be executed with a probability of 100%. . In this case, when the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode, a suggestive effect suggesting that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be performed may be performed. For example, an image written as "SPSP reach!" may be displayed as a suggestive effect. Even when the SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed, the suggestion performance may or may not be executed. Therefore, when the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode (when it changes to a predetermined display mode after the current variation starts, or when it changes to a predetermined display mode before the current variation starts ), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed. Incidentally, when the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode, the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be executed with a probability of 80% instead of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 19, for example, when the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) starts changing the first special symbol (time point T0), a start effect is performed. For example, as the start effect, as shown in FIG. 20B, a effect is performed in which the three decorative patterns 51 that have been stopped and started to move downward on the screen. In addition, as the start effect, the changing display 53 is erased, and the suspension displays 521 to 523 are shifted to the right. The rightmost pending display 521 is displayed as the changing display 53 . In the start effect, the three decorative patterns 51 may start moving at the same time, or each decorative pattern may start moving in order (for example, in order of left, right, and middle). Also, in the start effect, each decorative pattern may operate in a different operation mode. For example, the left decorative design and the right decorative design may move upward and then downward, while the middle decorative design may move downward without moving upward. Further, the fourth pattern 55 also starts to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern.

After the start effect is performed, high-speed variation is performed to vary the decorative pattern 51 at high speed (FIGS. 19 and 20(C)). After the high-speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds), a stop effect is performed. For example, as a stop effect, the left decorative pattern 51a moves from top to bottom at a low speed and temporarily stops in the left area (FIG. 20(D)), and then the right decorative pattern 51c moves from top to bottom at a low speed. 20(E)), and then the middle decorative pattern 51b moves from top to bottom at a low speed and temporarily stops in the middle area (FIG. 20(F)). Then, the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 20(G)), and at time T1 when the special pattern variation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed from time T0, the special pattern is stopped and displayed. In response to the stop display, the three decorative patterns 51 are stopped (completely stopped, referred to as "final stop") (FIG. 20(H)). Further, the fourth symbol 55 is also stopped according to the stop display of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 19, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, at time T2, the suspended special symbol determination (FIG. 20(A) Special symbol determination related to the pending display 522) is performed, and the variation of the special symbol is started. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 5, the start effect and high-speed variation are performed in the same manner as described above, and the special symbols are stopped and displayed at time T3 when the special symbol variation time (for example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from time T2. The decoration pattern 51 is stop-displayed according to the display stop of this special pattern. Further, when a predetermined stop display period has passed, at time T4, the suspended special symbol determination (special symbol determination related to the suspended display 523 in FIG. 20A) is performed, and the start effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 19, predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 24 during the variable display of the special symbols. Specifically, BGM1 is output from the speaker 24 in the case of the losing variation pattern.

BGM1 is a sound that is output by playing back predetermined audio data (for example, a file in wav format). BGM1 is, for example, a part of a predetermined music (for example, the prelude part of the music). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine with a specific singer who actually exists as a motif, and the song corresponding to the BGM 1 is the song of the specific singer.

BGM1 is a piece of music having a predetermined playback time. For example, BGM1 has a reproduction time (eg, 15 seconds) longer than the variation time of the loss variation pattern, or a playback time (eg, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the loss variation pattern.

In the state where BGM1 is not output, BGM1 is started to be reproduced from the beginning in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol. The BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output even during the stop display period of the special symbols. When there is no suspension of special symbol determination, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses after the special symbols are stopped, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs a customer waiting effect. In the customer waiting effect, a moving image or a still image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, but the BGM1 is not output. When the variation of the special pattern is started during this customer waiting effect, the variation effect using the decoration pattern 51 is started on the liquid crystal display device 5, and the BGM 1 is started to be reproduced from the beginning. During the customer waiting effect, when the player grips the handle 20 (or turns the lever 21), the customer waiting effect ends and the decorative pattern 51 stops on the liquid crystal display device 5. Reproduction of BGM1 may be started while the displayed image is displayed.

When the reproduction of the BGM1 is started in response to the start of the variation of the special symbols, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output during the variation of the special symbols. Also, even after the special symbols are stopped, the BGM1 is continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses. In the case where there are a plurality of suspensions of special symbol determination, when a losing variation pattern is selected, the special symbols are repeatedly varied and stopped. BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output even while the special symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped. When the reproduction of BGM1 ends (when the reproduction position of BGM1 reaches the end), BGM1 is restarted from the beginning.

The horizontal arrows of BGM1 in FIG. 19 indicate that the reproduction and output of BGM1 are continued while a plurality of special symbols are being varied. BGM1 having a reproduction time shorter than the period during which a plurality of special symbols are changed may be repeatedly reproduced. Also, BGM1 having a reproduction time longer than this period may be reproduced and output.

Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment stores a plurality of songs (for example, eight songs A to H) as songs of a specific singer. In the present embodiment, for example, there are eight production modes (stages) in the normal game state (normal mode), one of the eight production modes is selected, and one of the production modes is a variable production. is done. For example, when the special pattern fluctuates a predetermined number of times after the performance mode changes, the performance control unit 130 draws a lottery as to whether or not to change the performance mode when the next special symbol variation starts, and it is determined to change the performance mode. If so, one of the eight production modes is selected by lottery. A different background image is displayed for each production mode (stage), and different types of music are output during the variation of the special symbols. That is, the type of BGM1 that is output during the variation of the special symbol based on the losing variation pattern differs for each effect mode. For example, in production mode A (stage A), background image A for stage A is displayed, and in stage A, BGM_A1 is reproduced and output as part of music A. FIG. Further, when the production mode A (stage A) is switched to the production mode B (stage B), the background image B for the stage B is displayed, and in this stage B, BGM_B1 is reproduced as part of the music piece B. output. In addition, in the variable probability game state, there is a performance mode (stage in the variable probability mode) in the variable probability game state, a different background image is displayed for each performance mode, and different types of music are output during the variation of the special symbol.

In addition, if the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern and it is lost, in the fluctuation of the next special pattern, the playback position of BGM1 (elapsed time from the beginning) is in the middle in the fluctuation of the special pattern immediately before. Even if there is, BGM1 may be reproduced from the beginning. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol based on the losing variation pattern is repeated, the BGM1 may be reproduced from the beginning every time the variation of the special symbol is performed.

Here, the composition of the music will be explained. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the composition of music used in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 21, a piece of music is composed of, for example, five parts BGM1-5. Each song is divided into five parts, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, song A is divided into BGM_A1, BGM_A2, BGM_A3, BGM_A4, and BGM_A5. Music B is divided into BGM_B1, BGM_B2, BGM_B3, BGM_B4, and BGM_B5. Music C is also divided into BGM_C1-C5. Below, of the five parts of each song, the first part is "BGM1", the second part is "BGM2", the third part is "BGM3", the fourth part is "BGM4", and the fifth part is "BGM4". is written as "BGM5".

For example, BGM1 may be an introductory part (prelude part) of a specific piece of music. Also, BGM1 may be music that repeats the same or similar rhythm. This BGM1 is repeatedly output while the effect is being performed by the losing variation pattern shown in FIG. Although the details will be described later, this BGM1 is output during the pre-reach effect.

BGM2 is a part of a specific piece of music following BGM1. For example, BGM2 may be the part following the prelude part of a particular piece of music. BGM2 may be reproduced from the end of BGM1, or BGM2 may be reproduced from the middle of BGM1. Since BGM1 repeats a predetermined rhythm, even if BGM2 is reproduced from the end of BGM1 or BGM2 is reproduced from the middle of BGM1, there is no discomfort. Note that BGM1 and BGM2 may not necessarily have such a configuration. BGM1 does not have to be repetition of a predetermined rhythm. Although the details will be described later, this BGM2 is output during the N-reach effect.

BGM3 is a part of a specific piece of music following BGM2. For example, BGM3 may be the melody part of a particular piece of music. Although the details will be described later, this BGM3 is output during the SP ready-to-win effect.

BGM4 is a part of a specific piece of music following BGM3. For example, BGM4 may be the chorus of a particular piece of music. BGM4 has a predetermined reproduction time, and the reproduction time differs depending on the type of music (for example, 45 seconds, 55 seconds, 65 seconds, etc.). Although the details will be described later, this BGM4 is output during the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Also, BGM5 is a part of a specific piece of music following BGM4. For example, BGM5 may be the final chorus of a particular piece of music.

Note that the song is not limited to five parts, and may be divided into six or more parts, or may be divided into four or less parts.

(Production by jackpot fluctuation pattern or reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the effect when the big hit variation pattern or reach variation pattern is selected will be described.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of variation of special symbols and variation presentation when a big hit variation pattern or a ready-to-win variation pattern is selected.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (1), if any of the variation patterns OP1-1, OP1-2 (FIG. 18A), and the variation patterns HP1-1, HP1-2 (FIG. 18B) is selected, N Variation production including reach production is performed. Specifically, the ready-to-win production is performed according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbols. The before-reach production is a production before the ready-to-win production is performed. In this ready-to-win performance, for example, a start performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 51 starts to fluctuate, a notice performance is performed to suggest the possibility of a big win, and a pseudo-fluctuation performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 51 is again fluctuated. You can After the ready-to-win performance is performed, the ready-to-win state is established and the N ready-to-win performance (A or B) is performed. Then, as a result of the N-reach production, a winning/losing notification production showing the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a big win, a big win notification performance is performed in which three same kinds of decorative symbols are aligned. Also, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach-loss notification effect is performed in which three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned. Then, according to the stop display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 51 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (a mode in which three of the same kind of decorative symbols are aligned) or in a losing mode (a mode in which three of the same kind of decorative symbols are not aligned). stop).

Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (2), when any of the variation patterns OP2-1 to OP2-3 (FIG. 18A) and the variation patterns HP2-1 to HP2-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected, SP Variation production including reach production is performed. Specifically, according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the pre-reach production is performed, and then the N reach production (A or B) is performed. At the end of the N-reach production, an SP-development production is performed to indicate that the game will develop into an SP-reach production, and the SP-ready production (any of A to C) is started. Then, as a result of the SP ready-to-win production, a winning/losing notification production showing the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a big win, a big win notification performance is performed in which three same kinds of decorative symbols are aligned. Also, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach-loss notification effect is performed in which three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned. Then, according to the stop display of the special design, the decorative design 51 is stop displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), when any one of the variation patterns OP3-1 to OP3-3 (FIG. 18A) and the variation patterns HP3-1 to HP3-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected , SP reach performance and SPSP reach performance are performed. Specifically, according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the pre-reach production is performed, and then the N reach production (A or B) is performed. At the end of the N-reach production, an SP-development production is performed to indicate that the game will develop into an SP-ready production, and the SP-ready production (any of A to C) is started. Next, at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, an SPSP development effect is performed to indicate further development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect (any of A to C) is started. Then, as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win production, a winning/losing notification production showing the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a big win, a big win notification performance is performed in which three same kinds of decorative symbols are aligned. Also, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed in which the three same kinds of decorative symbols are not aligned. Then, according to the stop display of the special design, the decorative design 51 is stop displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 22(4), when any one of the variation patterns OP4-1 to OP4-3 (FIG. 18A) and the variation patterns HP4-1 to HP4-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected , SPSP reach production is performed. Specifically, according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the pre-reach production is performed, and then the N reach production (A or B) is performed. At the end of the N-reach production, an SPSP development production is performed to indicate that the game will develop into the SPSP ready-to-win production, and the SPSP ready-to-win production (any of A to C) is started. Then, as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win production, a winning/losing notification production showing the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a big win, a big win notification performance is performed in which three same kinds of decorative symbols are aligned. Also, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed in which the three same kinds of decorative symbols are not aligned. Then, according to the stop display of the special design, the decorative design 51 is stop displayed. Incidentally, the SPSP development effect suggesting the development from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect in FIG. 22(4) is the same as the SPSP development effect suggesting the development from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect in FIG. 22(3). It may be a performance, or it may be a different performance.

(Reach production and BGM control)
Next, a description will be given of the control of the BGM and specific examples of effects when effects are performed according to the respective effect patterns shown in FIG. The control of the BGM during the ready-to-win effect will be described.

((Control of BGM in production pattern of FIG. 22 (1)))
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when an N-reach effect is performed. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and an effect is performed according to the effect pattern of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 23, a pre-reach effect is performed in response to the start of variation of the special symbols at time T0. Specifically, as a pre-reach effect, as shown in FIG. 24(A), three decorative patterns 51 start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed (FIG. 24(B)). After that, the left decorative design 51a moves slowly from the top of the screen and temporarily stops in the left area (Fig. 24(C)). It moves slowly from the direction and temporarily stops in the right area (Fig. 24(D)).

BGM1 is output from the speaker 24 in the pre-reach effect. That is, during the ready-to-win effect, BGM1 is continuously output in the same way as when the effect based on the losing variation pattern is performed as described with reference to FIG. In the pre-reach effect, the pseudo-fluctuation effect may be performed as described above.

When the right decorative symbol 51c of the same kind as the left decorative symbol 51a temporarily stops, reach is established (time T1 in FIG. 23, FIG. 24(E)). When the reach is established, a reach establishment sound indicating that the reach is established is output from the speaker 24. - 特許庁As shown in FIG. 23, the BGM1 stops almost at the same time as the ready-to-reach establishment sound is output. Neither BGM1 nor BGM2 is output while the reach establishment sound is being output. Also, when ready-to-win is established, a linear image connecting three decorative patterns 51 is displayed to indicate that ready-to-win has been established. Further, when the reach is established, for example, a character image saying "reach!" may be displayed (FIG. 24(E)).

After the ready-to-win state is established, the N-reach effect is performed (FIG. 24(F)). BGM2 is output when the N-reach effect is performed. For example, BGM2 starts to be output after output of the ready-to-reach establishment sound is finished. It should be noted that BGM2 may be started to be output while the ready-to-reach establishment sound is being output. For example, BGM1 may be stopped and BGM2 may be started to be output at the same time when the ready-to-reach establishment sound is started to be output. Alternatively, BGM1 may be stopped first, a ready-to-win establishment sound may be output in response to reach establishment (display of a linear image in FIG. 24(E)), and BGM2 may start to be output while the ready-to-reach establishment sound is being output. . In this case, the volume of BGM2 may be controlled to gradually increase. For example, while the ready-to-reach establishment sound is output, the BGM2 starts to be output at a relatively low volume, and the volume of the BGM2 gradually increases until the output of the ready-to-reach establishment sound ends. , and the normal volume may be maintained during the subsequent N reach performance.

N-reach production is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the establishment of reach. During the N-reach effect, the normal background image is displayed as the background image, and the variation of the middle decorative pattern 51b is displayed. For example, the middle decorative pattern 51b moves slowly from the top of the screen, and an effect is performed to make the player expect that the same kind of decorative patterns as left and right stop in the middle area. During this time, as shown in FIG. 23, BGM2 is continuously output.

Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the middle decorative symbol 51b different from the right and left decorative symbols is temporarily stopped in the middle area at time T2, and a failure is notified (FIG. 24(G)). Almost at the same time when the middle decorative pattern 51b stops in the middle region, the BGM2 stops (T2 in FIG. 23(B)).

Incidentally, when the result of special symbol determination is a big win, the middle decorative symbols 51b of the same kind as the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop in the middle area at time T2, and a big win is notified (not shown). Almost at the same time when the middle decorative pattern 51b temporarily stops in the middle area, the BGM 2 stops (T2 in FIG. 23(A)). The probability that the big hit notification effect is performed from the N reach effect is extremely low, for example, 1/1000 or less. When the jackpot notification effect is performed, after the middle decorative pattern 51b of the same type as the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stops in the middle region, the decorative patterns are emphasized in a state where the three decorative patterns 51 of the same type temporarily stop (double stitches). is done. For example, three decorative patterns 51 are illuminated or an effect is applied to the three decorative patterns 51 as the emphasized display of the decorative patterns. Then, after the decorative patterns are highlighted, the three decorative patterns 51 are maintained in a temporarily stopped state for a predetermined period (for example, one second), and then the three decorative patterns 51 are permanently displayed in response to the stop of the special patterns. Stop.

When the result of the special design determination is a failure, the three decorative designs 51 remain temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the middle decorative design 51b different from the left and right decorative designs is stopped. When the result of the special design determination is a loss, the decorative design is not highlighted. After that, the three decorative symbols 51 are permanently stopped according to the stop display of the special symbols (FIG. 24(H)). During this time, BGM2 remains stopped.

When the right to judge special symbols is reserved, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a losing mode, the next special symbol starts to fluctuate. . At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. Also, if there is no reservation of the right to determine the special symbol, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and after that, when the game ball enters the start port, the next The variation of the special pattern of is started. Also in this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning.

That is, when a loss is notified without performing the ready-to-win effect, as described above, the BGM1 is continuously output even during the stop display period of the special symbol, and is output from the beginning of the BGM1 when the next special symbol starts to fluctuate. Reproduction is not started, and the variation of the next special symbol is started at a position in the middle of BGM1 (a position between the beginning and the end of the reproduction time). On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect is performed and the loss is reported, the BGM1 is started to be reproduced from the top when the next special symbol starts to fluctuate.

After the middle decorative pattern 51b is temporarily stopped at time T2, BGM1 may be started to be output while the three decorative patterns 51 are being temporarily stopped. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from its beginning. When the BGM1 is output while the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped, the BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) where the BGM1 was stopped at time T1.

((Control of BGM in production pattern of FIG. 22 (2)))
Next, the control of the BGM when the N reach effect is followed by the SP reach effect will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of control of BGM when the N reach effect is followed by the SP reach effect. FIG. 25A shows an effect pattern when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit, and FIG. 25B is an effect pattern when the result of special symbol determination is a loss. Also, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed from the N ready-to-win effect. FIG. 27 is an example of a screen diagram following FIG. 26, showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit.

As in FIG. 23, the special symbols start to fluctuate at time T0, a pre-reach effect is performed, and reach is established at time T1 (FIGS. 25 and 26 (A) to (E)). In addition, the pseudo-variation effect may be performed a predetermined number of times until reach is established. When the ready-to-win state is established, the N-reach effect is performed. It should be noted that the pseudo-variation effect may be performed until the reach is established, or the pseudo-variation effect may be performed during the N reach performance after the reach is established, and the reach is established again. For example, after the decorative symbols of different types (or the same type) are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides, the "NEXT" symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol indicating the pseudo-fluctuation effect) indicating that the pseudo-fluctuation effect is to be performed is provisionally used as the middle decorative symbol 51b. A pseudo-fluctuation performance may be performed in which the game is stopped and then the three decorative symbols 51 fluctuate again. When the pseudo-variation effect is performed, the BGM1 may be continuously output, or may be output from the beginning of the BGM1 each time the pseudo-variation is started. BGM for variable effects may be output.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when a pseudo-variation effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 29A, BGM1 may be played back from the beginning each time the pseudo-variation effect is performed. For example, when three pseudo-fluctuations are performed (when the "NEXT" pattern is stopped twice and re-fluctuations are performed twice), the BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning of the special symbol fluctuation start time T0, and the pseudo-1 Pseudo-fluctuations are made. Next, the "NEXT" symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle area, and the pseudo 2 pseudo variation is performed. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the BGM1 being reproduced is stopped and a pseudo-variation effect sound indicating a pseudo-variation effect is output. It should be noted that the timing at which the BGM1 being reproduced is stopped may not be the timing at which the "NEXT" pattern is stopped, but may be the timing at which the pseudo variation of the pseudo 2 starts after the "NEXT" pattern is stopped. BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning in accordance with the start of the pseudo variation of the pseudo 2. That is, the BGM1 being reproduced is stopped halfway when the pseudo-variation of the pseudo-1 ends, and the BGM1 is played back from the beginning in response to the start of the pseudo-variation of the pseudo-2. Furthermore, the "NEXT" pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area, and the pseudo-3 pseudo-variation is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, when the pseudo-variation effect is performed, the BGM1 may be reproduced so as to straddle the start points of each pseudo-variation. For example, when Pseudo 1, Pseudo 2, and Pseudo 3 are performed between time points T0 and T1, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning at the start time T0 of Pseudo 1, Pseudo 2 is started at a position in the middle of BGM1, and then Pseudo 2 is started. , BGM1, Pseudo 3 may be started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29(C), when the pseudo-variation effect is performed, the BGM1 is output in the pseudo-variation of the pseudo-1, and when the "NEXT" symbol stops in the middle region, the BGM1 stops and the pseudo-variation A production sound is output. It should be noted that the timing at which the BGM1 being reproduced is stopped may not be the timing at which the "NEXT" pattern is stopped, but may be the timing at which the pseudo variation of the pseudo 2 starts after the "NEXT" pattern is stopped. When the pseudo variation of the pseudo 2 is started, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo continuation is reproduced from its beginning. Furthermore, when the pseudo variation of the pseudo 3 is started, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo continuation may be played back from its beginning. Further, BGM dedicated to the pseudo-continuation may be output so as to straddle the pseudo fluctuation start point of the pseudo-3. That is, BGM1 is output in the pseudo variation of the pseudo 1, and in response to the start of the pseudo variation of the pseudo 2, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo continuation is reproduced from its beginning. Three pseudo-variations may be initiated.

Returning to FIGS. 25 and 26, as in FIG. 23, BGM1 is output during the pre-reach production, BGM1 is stopped when the reach establishment sound is output, and BGM2 is produced in response to the start of the N-reach production. output (FIG. 25). During the N-reach effect, similarly to FIG. 23, the middle decorative pattern 51b moves slowly from the upper part of the screen, and the left and right decorative patterns of the same kind are expected to stop (FIG. 26(F)). .

At the end of the N-reach production, for example, a decoration pattern ("7" pattern) different from the left and right decoration patterns slowly moves downward and stops in the middle region. Then, an effect is performed in which the "7" symbol does not stop in the middle area (or temporarily stops) but passes through the middle area (time T2 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26(G)). Then, an SP development effect suggesting development to an SP ready-to-win effect is performed (time points T2 to T3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26(H)). When the SP development effect is started, an SP development sound is output.

In the SP development effect, for example, the left decorative design 51a moves to the upper left of the screen while shrinking, and the right decorative design 51c moves to the upper right of the screen while shrinking (FIG. 26(H)). At this time, the character image as part of the left decorative pattern 51a is separated from the number image, and only the number image is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The same applies to the right decorative pattern 51c. In this way, when developing from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect, the decorativeness (size, presence/absence of characters) of the decorative pattern 51 is lowered. Also, in the SP development effect, a background switching effect in which the background image is switched is performed. Specifically, the normal background image is switched to the SP background image for SP ready-to-win effect. During the SP reach production, the SP background image is displayed as the background image.

Here, the manner in which the decorative symbols are displayed during each performance will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of decorative symbols during each effect. As shown in FIG. 30, during the stop display of the special symbols, each decorative symbol 51 is displayed in a manner including a number image (for example, "1" to "9") and a character image (or a photograph of a person). When the special symbols start to fluctuate, a relatively large decoration pattern including a number image and a character image starts to fluctuate. Also, during the pre-reach performance and during the N-reach performance, a relatively large decorative pattern including a number image and a character image is displayed. When a big hit or a loss is reported as a result of the N-reach effect, three relatively large decorative patterns including a number image and a character image are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative patterns are stopped in response to the stop of the special pattern. book stop. On the other hand, during the SP ready-to-win effect, a relatively small decorative pattern containing a number image and not containing a character image is displayed (see FIG. 27(I)). Also, during the SPSP ready-to-win performance, a relatively small decoration pattern including a number image and not including a character image is displayed. In addition, in the case of a big hit or a loss through the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect, when the three decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, a relatively large decorative pattern including a number image and a character image is displayed, and a special pattern is displayed. At the time of stop display, the three decorative symbols are actually stopped (see FIGS. 27(M) and (N) and FIGS. 28(L) and (M)). In addition, when a big win is achieved through the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect, when the three decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, a relatively large decorative pattern containing a number image and not containing a character image is displayed, and the special pattern is stopped. At the time of display, the three decorative patterns (relatively large decorative patterns that include a number image and do not include a character image) are actually stopped, and if the SP reach effect or the SP SP reach effect is lost, the three decorations are displayed. When the patterns are temporarily stopped, a relatively large decorative pattern including the number image and the character image is displayed, and when the special pattern is stopped and displayed, the three decorative patterns (relatively large decorative patterns including the number image and the character image) are displayed. may be permanently suspended.

Here, the decorative pattern in which the number image and the character image are included is called the "first mode decorative pattern", and the decorative pattern in which the number image is included but not the character image is called the "second mode decorative pattern". call.

In addition, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, for example, the decorative symbols of the second mode are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed second special symbols. Specifically, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the second mode) in which a character is not attached to a large number is displayed before the ready-to-win, which is a production period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the establishment of the ready-to-win. be done. This is the same for the time of winning/losing notification to actually stop the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination along with the stop of the second special symbol.

In addition, when reach is achieved in the variable probability game state, a battle reach effect in which the self character and the enemy character fight is performed without going through the N reach effect as in the normal game state. During the battle ready-to-win production in the variable probability game state, a comparatively small decorative pattern of the second mode is displayed in the same manner as during the SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-win in the normal game state.

Returning to FIG. 25, in the SP development effect, an SP development sound suggesting the SP development effect is output, and the BGM2 is stopped along with the output of the SP development sound. It should be noted that during the SP development effect suggesting development to the SP ready-to-play effect, the BGM2 may be continuously output and the SP development sound may not be output. Also, during the SP development effect, BGM2 and SP development sound may be output.

Next, the SP ready-to-win effect is started, and BGM3 is started to be reproduced (time T3 in FIG. 25, (I) in FIG. 27). That is, reproduction is started from the beginning of BGM3 at the timing when the SP ready-to-win effect is started. BGM3 has a predetermined reproduction time, and this reproduction time is almost equal to the effect time of the SP ready-to-win effect. It should be noted that the timing at which the output of BGM3 is started may be during the SP development effect. For example, the output of BGM3 may be started at the timing when the SP development effect starts. Further, the output of BGM3 may be started during the SP development effect after the SP development effect is started. For example, during the SP development effect, an SP development sound suggesting development to the SP ready-to-win effect may be output, and the output of BGM3 may be started at the timing when the output of the SP development sound ends. Also, BGM3 may be started to be output while the SP development sound is being output. At this time, the volume of BGM3 may be controlled to gradually increase. For example, during the output of the SP development sound, BGM3 is output at a lower volume than usual, and at the timing when the output of the SP development sound ends, the BGM3 becomes normal volume. may be output. Also, at the timing when the SP ready-to-win effect is started (T3 in FIG. 25), the output of BGM2 may be finished and the output of BGM3 may be started.

The type of BGM3 music output during the SP ready-to-win production is determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, when the big hit variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, in the variation production according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (production mode) during the reach pre-production, and the variation pattern during the SP reach production BGM_B3 may be output according to . Further, when the big hit variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, in the variation production according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (production mode) during the pre-reach production, and the variation pattern during the SP reach production. BGM_C3 may be output according to . Also, the type of music during the pre-reach production and the N-reach production may be determined by the variation pattern of the special symbols.

It should be noted that the type of BGM3 music output during the SP ready-to-win effect may differ depending on the stage (effect mode). For example, when an effect is being performed on stage A, BGM_A1 of music A may be output during the pre-reach effect, BGM_A2 may be output during the N reach effect, and BGM_A3 may be output during the SP reach effect. . Further, for example, when the production is being performed on the stage B, the BGM_B1 of the song B is output during the pre-reach production, the BGM_B2 is output during the N reach production, and the BGM_B3 is outputted during the SP reach production. good too.

As shown in FIG. 27, during the SP ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win moving image effect is performed in the central area of the screen, and the effect to expect that the left and right decorative patterns of the same kind as the left and right will stop is performed in the central area of the screen. (FIG. 27(J)). For example, in the SP reach animation effect, a predetermined 2D animation character performing a predetermined action is displayed, and a decorative pattern is displayed in the central area of the screen. BGM3 is output during the SP ready-to-win effect so as to synchronize with this moving image effect. For example, an effect is performed as to whether or not the animation character has achieved a predetermined mission, and when the animation character has achieved the predetermined mission, the three same kinds of decorative patterns are stopped to give a big win, and the predetermined mission is achieved. If there is not, the decorative patterns of different types on the left and right stop in the middle area, resulting in a loss. During the SP reach performance, the suspension display 52 and the changing display 53 are hidden. The suspension display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed during the SP reach production, the suspension display 52 may be hidden and the changing display 53 may be displayed, or the changing display 53 may be hidden and the pending display 52 may be displayed.

Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after the start of the SP ready-to-win production, a big hit notification production is performed (time T4 in FIG. 25 (A), FIG. 27 (K)). Specifically, the "8" symbol of the same kind as the left and right decorative symbols is temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol 51b.

When the middle decorative pattern 51b stops, the BGM 3 stops and a jackpot notification sound is output (FIG. 25(A)). For example, at the timing when the middle decorative pattern 51b stops, the BGM 3 may stop and a jackpot notification sound may be output. In addition, the BGM 3 stops just before the middle decorative pattern 51b stops (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and at the same time as the middle decorative pattern 51b stops (or immediately after the middle decorative pattern 51b stops), a jackpot notification sound is output. may be

After the middle decorative pattern 51b is stopped, a jackpot notification effect is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) (FIG. 27(L)). For example, during the big win notification effect, a state in which the animation character has completed a predetermined mission is displayed, or a character image indicating the big win is displayed. Also, the movable accessory 7 may operate. Further, during the jackpot notification effect, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 may emit light in a manner (for example, rainbow colors) indicating the jackpot.

Then, the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped relatively large in the center of the screen (Fig. 27 (M)), and then the three decorative patterns 51 are permanently stopped in response to the stop display of the special pattern (Fig. 27 (N )). Specifically, the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped (Fig. 27 (M)), and the decorative patterns are highlighted (for example, the three decorative patterns 51 are illuminated, or the three decorative patterns 51 are affected). ) is performed, and the three decorative patterns 51 are kept temporarily stopped for a predetermined period even after the decorative patterns are highlighted, and then the three decorative patterns 51 are permanently stopped in response to the stop of the special pattern (Fig. 27 (N)). When the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped and permanently stopped, a relatively large decorative pattern 51 (decorative pattern of the first mode) including a number image and a character image is displayed (Fig. 27 (M) (N)). . Then, after an opening performance indicating that a big winning game is to be played is performed, the big winning game is started.

Here, the highlight display of the above-mentioned decorative design will be explained. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the three decoration patterns of the first mode forming doublets are temporarily stopped, the "first reflex effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). . The “first reflection effect” is a effect in which highlight light such as metallic luster is added to each decorative pattern, and a sound such as “Pishaan!” is output from the speaker 24 . In the first reflection effect, for example, highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the left pattern, and at the same time, the highlight light is similarly added to the middle pattern and the right pattern. As a result, the light applied to the decorative pattern can be made to appear as if it is mirror-reflected on the front surface of the decorative pattern, and the three same kinds of decorative patterns can be emphasized as if they were objects having metallic luster, so that the patterns are uniform. can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first reflection effect is an effect executed using the decorative pattern of the first mode, and is an effect not executed using the decorative pattern of the second mode.

After the three decorative patterns of the first mode forming the parallel eyes are temporarily stopped, the promotion effect may be performed without performing the first reflection effect (or after the first reflection effect is performed). . The promotion performance is, for example, a performance to expect that the three decorative patterns of the first mode forming doublets of ``888'' will change to the three decorative patterns forming doublets of ``777''. The doublet of "777" and "333" indicates, for example, a 10R probability variable jackpot, the doublet of even patterns such as "888" indicates, for example, a 4R normal jackpot, odd patterns such as "111" ("777" and Odd numbers excluding “333”) double eyes indicate a 4R probability variable jackpot. A promotion success effect is a change from doubles such as "888" indicating a normal jackpot to doubles like "777" or "111" indicating a variable jackpot. On the other hand, an effect that does not change from a double number such as "888" that indicates a normal jackpot to a double number that indicates a probability variable jackpot is called a promotion failure effect.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the promotion failure presentation or the promotion success presentation is started, the "second reflex presentation" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). In the "second reflection effect", for example, highlight light is added to each decorative pattern in the same manner as in the first reflection effect, and the character's words attached to the numbers that make up the decorative pattern (for example, "Time is full" ”) is output from the speaker 24 . In the second reflection effect, for example, highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the numbers that make up the left pattern, and at the same time, the numbers that make up the middle and right patterns are similarly highlighted. Add light. Thus, in the second reflection effect, the numbers are highlighted while the characters are not highlighted. It is different from reflex production. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the decoration patterns in the form of matching patterns to be finally stopped without degrading the visibility of the character that emits the lines.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second reflection effect is an effect executed using the decorative pattern of the first mode, and is an effect not executed using the decorative pattern of the second mode.

In this embodiment, it is configured such that the stop display timing of the first special symbol comes when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has passed since the end of the second reflection effect. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has passed since the end of the second reflection effect, the decoration pattern starts to stop. By providing a predetermined time between the second reflex effect and the main stop, for example, even if frames of the image are dropped in the second reflex effect, it can be prevented from affecting the main stop.

The time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative symbols may be different depending on the game state, or may be the same. Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the time from the first reflex effect or the second reflex effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern may be different or may be the same. Further, the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern may differ depending on the type of the decorative pattern that constitutes the doublet. When a decorative symbol (for example, "777") showing a relatively advantageous jackpot is permanently stopped, when a decorative pattern (for example, "888") indicating a relatively unfavorable jackpot is finally stopped. Rather, the time from the first reflex effect or the second reflex effect to the final stop may be longer or shorter.

FIG. 28 is an example of a screen diagram following FIG. 26, and is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after the start of the SP reach production, a reach loss notification production is performed (FIG. 25 (B) time T4, FIG. 28(K)). Specifically, as the middle decorative pattern 51b, a decorative pattern different from the right and left decorative patterns (for example, "7" pattern) is temporarily stopped. When the middle decorative pattern 51b stops, the BGM3 stops (FIG. 25(B)). For example, at the timing when the middle decorative pattern 51b stops, the BGM 3 may stop and a reach-losing notification sound may be output. In addition, the BGM 3 stops immediately before the middle decorative pattern 51b stops (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and at the same time as the middle decorative pattern 51b stops (or immediately after the middle decorative pattern 51b stops), a reach-losing notification sound is output. may be

Then, the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped in a relatively large size in the center of the screen in a manner of losing (FIG. 28(L)), and thereafter, according to the stop display of the special patterns, the decorative patterns are not highlighted. The three decorative patterns 51 are finally stopped (FIG. 28(M)). When the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped and permanently stopped, a relatively large decorative pattern 51 including a number image and a character image is displayed.

When the right to judge special symbols is reserved, after a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a failing mode, the next special symbols are started to fluctuate. . At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. Also, if there is no reservation of the right to determine the special symbol, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and after that, when the game ball enters the starting port, the next The variation of the special pattern of is started. Also in this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) where it stopped at time T1 in FIG. 25(B).

After the middle decorative pattern 51b is stopped at time T4 shown in FIG. 28(K), the output of BGM1 may be started while the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from its beginning. In another form, when BGM1 is output while the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped, BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) where it stopped at time T1 in FIG. 25(B).

In addition, in FIGS. 25A and 25B, it is assumed that the special symbols stop at the same time T5 in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss, but in reality, the variation time of the special symbols is longer in the case of a big win. is long. Therefore, the timing of time T5 in the jackpot pattern of FIG. 25A is later than the timing of time T5 in the losing pattern of FIG. long.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, different BGM is output before reach, during N reach, and during SP reach. As described above, before reach, during N reach, and during SP reach, the modes of the decorative symbols are different. Therefore, it can be said that the mode of the decorative design and the BGM are related to each other. Specifically, BGM1 is output when relatively large decorative patterns of the first mode (decorative patterns including a number image and a character image) are displayed in a high-speed variability manner (FIGS. 26A to 26C). ), and BGM1 stops when two relatively large decorative patterns of the first mode stop in the left and right regions (FIG. 26(E)). When two relatively large decorative patterns of the first mode stop in the left and right areas and one relatively large decorative pattern of the first mode is variably displayed in the middle area at a low speed, BGM2 is output. (FIGS. 26(F) to (G)). In the process of changing the relatively large decorative pattern of the first mode to the relatively small decorative pattern of the second mode, the BGM2 is stopped and the SP development sound is output (FIG. 26(H)). Then, two relatively small decorative patterns of the second mode stop at the left and right ends of the screen (positions further to the left and right than the positions of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern in front of the reach), and a relatively large 1 When the two decorative patterns of the second mode are fluctuating in the middle area of the screen, BGM3 is output (FIGS. 27(I) to (J)).

(Control of BGM in production pattern of FIG. 22 (3))
Next, the control of the BGM in the case where the N reach effect develops into the SP reach effect and further develops into the SP SP reach effect will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SP ready-to-win effect is further developed into the SP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram after the SP ready-to-win effect is started. FIG. 33 is an example of an effect following FIG. 32(H), and is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of special symbol determination is a big win.

31, portions different from those in FIG. 25 will be described, and descriptions of portions similar to those in FIG. 25 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 31, pre-ready effect and N-reach effect are performed in order, SP development effect is performed, and SP ready-to-win effect is started (T0 to T3 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32(A)).

Next, in the middle or at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, an SPSP development effect to suggest the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed (T4 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32(B)). For example, in the central area of the screen, as the middle decorative pattern 51b, the SPSP development suggesting pattern that suggests the development of the SPSP ready-to-win effect is stopped, or a predetermined animation character grasping the SPSP development suggesting pattern is displayed. may In addition, the movable accessory 7 may operate along with the stop of the SPSP development suggesting pattern.

Subsequently, an image showing the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect to be executed is displayed as the SPSP development effect (Fig. 32(C)). For example, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect A is executed, the SPSP developed image A is displayed, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect B is executed, the SPSP developed image B is displayed, and when the SPSP ready-to-win effect C is executed. , SPSP development image C is displayed. For example, as the SPSP development effect, a title display indicating the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect to be executed is displayed. When this title display is displayed, a sound corresponding to the title display may be output. For example, when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (for example, OP3-3) is selected, a title display C indicating an SPSP ready-to-win effect C is displayed, and an SPSP ready-to-win effect C with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. be. Further, when a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (for example, OP3-1) is selected, a title display A indicating SPSP ready-to-win effect A is displayed, and SPSP ready-to-win effect A with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. be. Here, the title display may be the title of the song.

In addition, in the SPSP development effect, a switching image is displayed to indicate switching to the SPSP ready-to-win effect (Fig. 32(D)). For example, as the switching image, an image in which the images of the left and right doors are closed may be displayed. Note that a blackout effect (also referred to as a blackout effect) may be performed between the display of the image in FIG. 32(B) and the time when the image in FIG. 32(D) is displayed. For example, after the SPSP development suggesting pattern suggesting the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is stopped, the blackout effect may be performed, and then the title display of FIG. 32(C) may be displayed. Here, the blackout effect (darkening effect) is a effect in which the entire screen is displayed in a dark state by displaying a relatively dark image from a state in which a relatively bright image was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. This is an effect (dark display effect) that makes the decorative pattern 51, other preview images, etc. invisible or invisible (hidden). For example, in the blackout effect, a black image or a relatively dark gray image is placed on the front side layer of the background image or the decorative pattern 51 over the entire screen, thereby covering the entire screen with a dark image and darkening the entire screen. It is a performance to do. Here, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, images displayed on the screen are managed in a plurality of layers. For example, the background image is arranged in the innermost layer (lower priority layer), 51 is placed in the foremost layer (layer with the highest priority), and when these multiple layers are displayed on the screen, the image on the foreground layer is displayed, and the image on the back layer is displayed on the foreground. hidden in the image of the layer of . Therefore, when a black image is placed on the frontmost layer, the image on the back layer is hidden by the black image, and as a result, the entire screen is covered with the black image, making other images invisible. Alternatively, by arranging a black image with a predetermined transparency on the frontmost layer, the image on the back layer may be made invisible. A blackout effect may be performed by such a method. Also, in the blackout rendering, the background image may be replaced with a black image or a relatively dark gray image. In addition, in the blackout effect, the background image is darkened (hidden) by arranging a black image in the layer between the background image and the decorative pattern 51, while the decorative pattern 51 is not darkened (relatively bright). displayed as an image). Further, as the blackout effect, in addition to (or instead of) the effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, an effect of turning off the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 or reducing the amount of light thereof may be performed. . In addition, before the SPSP development suggesting pattern suggesting the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is stopped, the blackout effect may be performed, and then the SPSP development suggesting pattern of FIG. 32(B) may be stopped. Also, the blackout effect may be performed after the title display is displayed.

At time T4 when the SPSP development effect is started, the output of BGM3 is stopped. For example, at the timing when the SPSP development suggesting symbol is stopped, an SPSP development sound suggesting development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be output, and the BGM 3 may be stopped at the same time as the SPSP development sound is output. In addition, BGM3 may be stopped immediately before the SPSP development suggesting pattern is stopped (for example, 0.5 seconds before). Also, BGM3 may be stopped after the SPSP development suggesting pattern is stopped. Further, a blackout effect may be performed at time T4, and BGM3 may be stopped in accordance with the start of the blackout effect. When the blackout effect ends, an effect indicating that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be performed (for example, a title display indicating the type of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a sound indicating that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be performed) may be performed.

During the blackout effect, a sound limited state in which sound output is limited may be set. Here, the sound limited state is a silent state in which no sound is output, or a state in which relatively loud sounds are not output and only relatively soft sounds are output. BGM is not output in the sound restricted state. Even when the sound is restricted during the blackout effect, an error sound is output when the gaming machine 1 detects an error. For example, when the game machine 1 detects fraud (for example, when magnetism is detected or when the player hits right when the player should hit left), or when it detects that the lower tray is full. outputs an error sound according to the content of the detection. In addition, when there is a winning to the starting hole of the game ball in the sound restricted state, the predetermined winning sound corresponding to the winning may or may not be output. In addition, when there is a winning in the starting hole of the game ball in the sound restricted state, there are times when the winning sound is output and times when it is not output depending on the degree of expectation of the big hit pending the special symbol judgment related to the winning. good too.

When the SPSP ready-to-win performance C with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed, a blackout performance is performed during the execution of the SPSP development performance and the sound is likely to be restricted, and the SPSP ready-to-win performance with a relatively low degree of expectation is performed. When A is executed, it may be difficult to perform the blackout effect during execution of the SPSP development effect. When the SPSP ready-to-win performance C is executed, the blackout performance is executed with a probability of 100% during the execution of the SPSP advanced performance, and when the SPSP ready-to-win performance A is executed, the SPSP advanced performance is executed. A blackout effect may not be performed during this.

After the SPSP development effect is performed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started (T5 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32(E)). Reproduction of BGM4 is started in accordance with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. That is, reproduction is started from the beginning of BGM4 at the timing when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. BGM4 has a predetermined reproduction time, and this reproduction time is almost equal to the effect time of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

It should be noted that the timing at which the output of BGM4 is started may be during the SPSP development presentation. For example, an SPSP development sound that suggests development to an SPSP ready-to-win production during an SPSP development production (for example, a sound effect output with the image of FIG. 32(B), or a sound output with the title display of FIG. 32(C)) is output, and the output of BGM4 may be started at the timing when the output of the SPSP development sound ends. Also, BGM4 may be started to be output while the SPSP development sound is being output. At this time, the volume of BGM4 may be controlled to gradually increase. For example, during the output of the SPSP development sound, BGM4 is output at a lower volume than normal, and at the timing when the output of the SPSP development sound ends, the BGM4 becomes normal volume, and then during the SPSP reach production, BGM4 is output at the normal volume. may be output. The normal volume of BGM4 during this SPSP reach effect is higher than the normal volume of BGM3 (also BGM1 and 2). The normal volume of BGM4 may be the same as the normal volume of BGM3 (that is, the volume of BGM during the SP reach effect). Further, at the timing when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started (T5 in FIG. 31), the output of BGM3 may be finished and the output of BGM4 may be started.

The type of BGM4 music output during the SPSP ready-to-win production is determined by the variation pattern of the special symbols. For example, when the big hit variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, in the variation production according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (production mode) during the reach pre-production, and the variation pattern during the SPSP reach production BGM_B4 may be output according to . In addition, when the big hit variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, in the variation performance according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (performance mode) during the pre-reach performance, and the variation pattern is output during the SPSP reach performance. BGM_C4 may be output according to .

Thus, while the type of BGM1 during the ready-to-reach production differs depending on the production mode (stage) that does not depend on the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of BGM3 during the SP ready-to-win production and the BGM4 during the SPSP ready-to-produce production are different. It may differ according to the variation pattern of the design. Also, the type of music during the N-reach production may differ according to the variation pattern, or may differ according to the production mode. Also, the type of music during the N-reach production may be fixed regardless of the variation pattern or the production mode. For example, during the N reach production, the fixed BGM (BGM that varies depending on the production mode, or the same BGM in any production mode) regardless of the variation pattern, while during the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production, the variation BGM corresponding to the pattern may be output.

For example, as described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect is performed in one of eight effect modes (stages) in the normal game state. In each stage, the type of BGM1, the background image, etc. are different. In the same stage, even if the variation patterns of the special symbols are different, the same kind of BGM1 is output during the pre-reach performance. On the other hand, for example, the type of BGM4 during the SPSP ready-to-win effect differs depending on the variation pattern of the special symbols. For example, when the variation pattern OP3-1 is selected, BGM_A4 may be output during the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and when the variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, BGM_B4 may be output during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Note that the type of music (music A to music H) may be determined according to the variation pattern, and the same type of music may be output from the start of the variation. In this case, the same kind of musical piece is output through the pre-reach production, the N-ready production, the SP ready-to-reach production, and the SPSP ready-to-reach production, and each part of the same kind of musical piece is outputted according to each production.

It should be noted that the type of music of BGM4 that is output during the SPSP ready-to-win production may differ according to the stage (production mode). For example, when the performance is being performed on stage A, BGM_A1 of music A is output during pre-reach performance, BGM_A2 is output during N reach performance, BGM_A3 is output during SP reach performance, and SPSP reach performance. is started, BGM_A4 of music A may be output.

In the SPSP ready-to-win animation production shown in FIG. 32(E), for example, a live-action image is displayed, and at the same time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the central area of the screen. For example, an effect is performed as to whether or not a person in the live-action video will achieve a predetermined mission. During the SPSP ready-to-win presentation, the suspension display 52 and the changing display 53 are hidden. The suspension display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the suspension display 52 may be hidden and the changing display 53 may be displayed, or the changing display 53 may be displayed. may be hidden and the pending display 52 may be displayed. In the SPSP ready-to-win production, the variation of the middle decorative pattern 51b is displayed, and at the same time, as the middle decorative pattern 51b, a production that makes the player expect that the decorative patterns of the same kind as the left and right decorative patterns will stop is performed (Fig. 32(F)). For example, an effect is performed in which a "8" pattern of the same type as the left and right decorative patterns and a "7" pattern of a different type push each other.

Following FIG. 32(F), BGM4 stops and the image in the screen momentarily stops (FIG. 32(G)) immediately before (for example, one second before) the big win notification effect at the end of the SPSP reach. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(F), the movement of the two decorative patterns gradually slows down from the state in which the two decorative patterns are pushing against each other in the central area of the screen, and the movement of the two decorative patterns stops momentarily. do. BGM4 stops at this timing.

Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win, a big win notification effect is performed at time T6 (T6 in FIG. 31, (H) in FIG. 32). Specifically, as the middle decorative pattern 51b, the "8" pattern of the same kind as the left and right decorative patterns is temporarily stopped, and the movable accessory 7 moves and advances to the vicinity of the center of the screen. The movable accessory 7 is normally housed between the game board 2 and the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and as shown in FIG. is configured as Also, in the jackpot notification effect, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in a manner (for example, rainbow colors) indicating the jackpot.

After the big win notification effect is performed, the post-big win notification effect is performed (FIG. 33(I)). In the effect after the big hit is announced, the movable accessories 7 advanced to the vicinity of the center of the screen are stored in the initial positions (both sides of the screen), and the moving image in which the person in the live-action image has achieved a predetermined mission is displayed in the center of the screen. be.

Next, the screen is switched, and three decorative patterns 51 of the same kind are displayed in a large size in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (slightly changed) (FIG. 33(J)). Then, according to the stop of the special symbols, the three same kinds of decorative symbols 51 are permanently stopped (FIG. 33(K)). Specifically, the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 33(J)), and the decorative patterns are highlighted (for example, the three decorative patterns 51 are illuminated, or the three decorative patterns 51 are effected. ) is performed, and the three decorative patterns 51 are kept temporarily stopped for a predetermined period even after the decorative patterns are highlighted, and then the three decorative patterns 51 are permanently stopped in response to the stop of the special pattern (Fig. 33(K)). When the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped and permanently stopped, a relatively large decorative pattern including a number image and a character image is displayed. Incidentally, when the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped and permanently stopped, a relatively large decorative pattern containing a number image and not containing a character image may be displayed.

FIG. 34 is an effect following FIG. 32(F), showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 34, after an effect similar to that of FIG. 32(G) is performed, at time T6, a reach-losing notification effect is performed (T6 in FIG. 31(B), FIG. 34(H)). Specifically, as the middle decorative pattern 51b, the "7" pattern different from the left and right decorative patterns is temporarily stopped. Here, as shown in FIG. 32(H), the movable accessory 7 does not move. Further, in the reach-losing notification effect, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 do not emit light in a manner (for example, rainbow color) indicating a big hit. Then, the screen is switched, and three decorative patterns 51 (decorative patterns including a number image and a character image) are displayed in a large size in the center of the screen in a failing manner and temporarily stopped, and the decorative patterns are not highlighted. , Three decorative symbols 51 are finally stopped according to the stop of the special symbols (FIG. 34(I)).

Here, the details of sound control after the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of sound control after the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the case of a big hit or a loss.

As shown in FIG. 35(A), when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win, after a predetermined time has passed since the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, a big win notification effect is performed at time T6. BGM4 stops just before this big hit notification effect (for example, one second before time T6). Then, at time T6, a big win notification effect is started and a big win notification sound is output. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect indicating a jackpot, and is louder than the BGM4. In addition, a role product presentation in which the movable accessory 7 moves is also performed. After the jackpot notification sound and the performance of the character object are performed, the movable character object 7 may be retracted to the initial position, and BGM5 following BGM4 may be output. BGM5 may be, for example, the end of the chorus of the song (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). After that, at the time point T7, the variable effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35(B), when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, after a predetermined time has passed since the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, a ready-to-win losing notification effect is performed at time T6. BGM4 stops immediately before this reach-losing notification effect (for example, one second before time T6). Then, at time T6, a reach-losing notification effect is performed. In the reach-loss notification effect, the jackpot notification sound is not output, but the reach-loss notification sound is output. The volume of this reach-losing notification sound is smaller than that of the big-hit notification sound. Also, in the case of a loss, BGM5 following BGM4 is not output.

After the reach-losing notification effect is performed, if there is a reservation of the right to judge the special symbol, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the next special symbol is displayed. Fluctuations begin. At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. Also, if there is no reservation of the right to determine the special symbol, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and after that, when the game ball enters the start port, the next The variation of the special pattern of is started. Also in this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning.

After the middle decorative pattern 51b is stopped at time T6 shown in FIG. 34(H), during the temporary stop of the three decorative patterns 51 (that is, while the image shown in FIG. 34(I) is being displayed). , BGM1 may be started to be output. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from its beginning. When BGM1 is output while the three decorative patterns 51 are temporarily stopped, BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) where the BGM1 was stopped at time T1 in FIG. 31(B).

In addition, in FIGS. 35A and 35B, it is assumed that the special symbols stop at the same time T7 both in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss, but in reality, the fluctuation time of the special symbols is longer in the case of a big win. is long. Therefore, the timing of time T7 in the jackpot pattern of FIG. 35A is later than the timing of time T7 in the losing pattern of FIG. long.

Here, there is a difference between the timing at which the BGM 4 is stopped and the timing at which the big win notification effect or reach-losing notification effect is performed. For example, the BGM 4 is stopped 1 second before the timing at which the big win notification effect or the ready-to-win loss notification effect is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, the timing at which the BGM3 during the SP ready-to-win effect is stopped is substantially equal to the timing at which the big win notification effect or the ready-to-win losing notification effect is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 31, even when the SP ready-to-win effect develops into the SP ready-to-win effect, the timing at which BGM3 during the SP ready-to-win effect stops is substantially equal to the timing at which the SP developing effect is performed.

That is, the difference between the timing at which BGM4 during the SP reach production stops and the timing at which the winning/losing notification production (jackpot notification production or reach losing notification production) is executed is the timing at which BGM3 during the SP reach production stops and the winning/losing notification production ( It is larger than the difference from the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or the ready-to-win failure notification effect) or the SP development effect is executed. That is, when the win-lose notification effect is performed from the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the win-lose notification effect is performed after the lapse of the first time (for example, 1 second) after the BGM4 is stopped. On the other hand, when the win-lose notification effect is performed from the SP ready-to-win effect, or when the SP ready-to-win effect is followed by the SPSP development effect, the win-lose notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed almost at the same time as the BGM3 is stopped.

Incidentally, even when the win/lose notification effect is performed from the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP development effect is performed from the SP ready-to-win effect, the BGM 3 may be stopped immediately before the win/lose notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed. For example, BGM3 may be stopped 0.5 seconds before the win-lose notification effect or SPSP development effect is performed. That is, when the win-lose notification effect is performed from the SP reach effect, or when the SP reach development effect is performed from the SP reach effect, the second time after BGM3 stops (for example, 0 seconds or 0 seconds shorter than the first time) .5 seconds), a win/lose notification effect or an SPSP development effect may be performed.

In the above description, when the win-lose notification effect is performed from the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the BGM4 is stopped immediately before the win-lose notification effect is started. good too.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 35, the decoration patterns before reach, during N reach, during SP reach, and during SP reach, and BGM are related to each other. Specifically, from the start of fluctuation to a predetermined timing during SP reach is the same as the SP reach performance. During or at the end of the SP reach, when the two relatively small decorative patterns of the second mode stop at the left and right ends of the screen and when the SPSP development suggesting pattern stops in the middle area, BGM3 stops (Fig. 32 ( B)). This SPSP development suggesting pattern is larger than the decorative pattern of the second mode stopped on the left and right. After that, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started in a state in which two relatively small decorative symbols of the second mode are stopped at the left and right ends of the screen, BGM4 is output (FIG. 32(E)). Here, the left and right decorative symbols of the second mode in the SP reach may have the same size as the left and right second mode decorative symbols in the SP reach, or may have different sizes. For example, the left and right decorative symbols of the second mode during SP reach may be smaller than the left and right second mode decorative symbols during SP reach. BGM 4 stops just before two relatively small decorative patterns of the second mode stop at the left and right ends of the screen and one relatively large decorative pattern of the second mode stops in the middle area of the screen. do.

(Control of BGM in production pattern of FIG. 22 (4))
Next, BGM control when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed from the N ready-to-win effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed from the N ready-to-win effect. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed from the N ready-to-win effect. FIG. 38 is an example of a screen diagram following FIG. 37, showing an example of a screen diagram when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 36, the ready-to-win pre-production is performed in accordance with the start of fluctuation of the special symbols, and the N-ready-to-win production is performed (T0 to T1 in FIG. 36, FIGS. 37(A) to (F)). Specifically, BGM1 is output during the pre-reach effect, and when the reach is established, the BGM1 is stopped and the reach establishment sound is output. Then, BGM2 is output at the same time as the N-reach effect is started.

Next, immediately before time T2, the SPSP development suggesting pattern suggesting the development to SPSP ready-to-win production slowly moves from the top to the bottom of the screen (FIG. 37(G)). Then, the SPSP development suggesting pattern stops in the central area of the screen and the SPSP development effect is started (T2 in FIG. 36, FIG. 37(H)). At this time, the BGM2 is stopped, and an SPSP development sound suggesting development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is output. In addition, when the SPSP development suggestion pattern does not stop in the central area of the screen, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not developed.

In the SPSP development effect, similarly to the above, the left decorative design 51a moves to the upper left of the screen while shrinking, and the right decorative design 51c moves to the upper right of the screen while shrinking. At this time, the character image as part of the left decorative pattern 51a is separated from the number image, and only the number image is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The same applies to the right decorative pattern 51c. In this way, when the N-reach performance develops into the SPSP-reach performance, the decorativeness (size, presence/absence of characters) of the decorative pattern 51 is lowered.

In addition, in the SPSP development effect, similarly to when the SP ready-to-win effect develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the title is displayed (Fig. 38 (I)), and a switching image indicating switching to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed ( FIG. 38(J)). Note that a blackout effect may be performed between the display of the screen of FIG. 37(H) and the display of the screen of FIG. 38(J). For example, after the SPSP development suggesting pattern suggesting the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is stopped, the blackout effect may be performed, and then the title display of FIG. 38(I) may be displayed. Also, a blackout effect may be performed before the SPSP development suggesting pattern is stopped, and then the title display of FIG. 38(I) may be displayed.

After the SPSP development effect, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started and BGM4 is started to be output (T3 in FIG. 36, FIG. 38(K)). Thereafter, in the same manner as described above, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed, and when the result of special symbol determination is a big hit, a big hit notification effect is performed (T4 in FIG. 36, (L) to (N) in FIG. 38). If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed (not shown).

BGM4 is stopped immediately before the big win notification effect or the ready-to-win failure notification effect is performed (FIGS. 36 and 38 (M)). Specifically, just before (for example, 1 second) before the start of the big win notification effect or the ready-to-win failure notification effect, the BGM 4 stops, as in FIG. 35 .

Incidentally, when the big win notification effect or the ready-to-lose notification effect is performed from the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the BGM 4 may be stopped at the same time as the big win notification effect or the ready-to-loss notification effect is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific piece of music is output during the variable effect, and the effect progresses according to the output of the music. Specifically, the music is composed of BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, and BGM5, BGM1 is output during the pre-reach effect, BGM2 is output during the N reach effect, and BGM3 is output during the SP reach effect, BGM4 is output during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. In addition, BGM5 is output in the jackpot notification effect. That is, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, and BGM4 are output in order as the effect progresses like pre-reach effect, N reach effect, SP reach effect, and SPSP reach effect. In this way, since the music progresses as the production progresses, a player who knows the music can recognize the progress of the production by the position of the music, and depending on which part of the music is output, which part of the music is output. It is possible to recognize whether the ready-to-win effect is being executed and to recognize the degree of expectation.

In addition, during the ready-to-reach preproduction, BGM1, which is the introductory part of the music, is repeatedly output. BGM1 is a repetition of a predetermined rhythm, and the predetermined rhythm is repeated even when the losing variation pattern (FIG. 18C) is continuously selected. Even when the reach variation pattern (FIG. 18B) or the jackpot variation pattern is selected when the losing variation pattern is continuous, BGM1 is output in the reach-before performance in the variation performance by the reach variation pattern or the jackpot variation pattern, After that, according to the execution of the N-reach effect, the SP-reach effect, etc., the BGM1 is shifted to another BGM. Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the production according to the flow of the music without any sense of incongruity.

Also, in this embodiment, the BGM is stopped when a certain effect is transferred to another effect. For example, when the N reach effect develops into the SP reach effect, BGM2 is stopped, and then BGM3 is output. Also, when the SP ready-to-win effect develops into the SP ready-to-win effect, BGM3 is stopped, and then BGM4 is output. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the boundary of each ready-to-win effect, for example, to easily recognize that the N-ready-to-win effect has shifted to the highly anticipated SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, by stopping the BGM when developing from one ready-to-win production to another ready-to-win production, even if the length of each production does not completely match the length of each part of the music, You can adjust the time. For example, in the variable production that develops from the N-reach production to the SP-ready production shown in FIG. By stopping the BGM2 during the development production, it is possible to match the flow of the ready-to-win production with the progress of the music.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot notification effect for notifying the jackpot is executed, the BGM that has been output immediately before is stopped. For example, when the big win notification effect is executed from the N reach effect, the BGM 2 is stopped at the timing when the big win notification effect is executed. In addition, when the big win notification performance is executed from the SP ready-to-win performance, the BGM3 during the SP ready-to-win performance is stopped at the timing when the big win reporting performance is executed (2nd time before the big win notification performance is executed). Also, when the big win notification effect is executed from the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the big win notification effect is executed (before the first time). As a result, it is possible to emphasize the big hit notification effect.

(Control of BGM when effects other than ready-to-win effects are performed)
Next, the control of BGM when other effects are performed during execution of pre-reach effects and ready-to-win effects (N reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) will be described. Hereinafter, regarding the control of BGM when other effects are performed during the pre-reach production, the fluctuation production that develops from the N reach production to the SPSP reach production (variation patterns OP4-1 to 3, HP4-1 to 3 Variation performance based on) will be described as an example. In addition, it is not limited to the variable performance that develops from the N reach performance to the SP SP reach performance, the variable performance that does not perform the reach performance, the variable performance that the N reach performance is performed, the variation performance that the N reach performance and the SP reach performance are performed, N As for the variable performance that develops from the ready-to-win effect to the SP ready-to-win effect and further to the SP-to-win effect, the same effect as the following is sometimes performed, and the same control related to BGM is performed.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 130 determines a variable effect scenario (each effect pattern in FIG. 22) including a ready-to-win effect based on the variation pattern determined by the game control unit 100 . After determining the variable production scenario, the production control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute a first production (for example, advance notice production) other than the ready-to-win production by lottery using random numbers. When a certain variation pattern is determined, the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, but even when the same variation pattern is determined, the first performance other than the ready-to-win performance is sometimes performed. sometimes not. The control of the BGM when the first effect is performed and when it is not performed will be described below.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the first effect is executed while BGM1 is being output when the result of special symbol determination is a big win.

As described above, BGM1 is continuously output during the pre-reach effect. During this time, BGM1 having a reproduction time shorter than the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be repeatedly reproduced, or BGM1 having a reproduction time longer than the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be reproduced. Also, BGM1 having the same reproduction time as the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be reproduced.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first effect may be executed during execution of the pre-reach effect (for example, time t1 before time T1 at which the N-reach effect is started). The first effect is a effect based on the result of the special symbol determination. The first effect may be a notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big win (for example, a notice effect with an expectation level of 0.1% to 80%), or a confirmed effect suggesting that a big win game will be executed. (The degree of expectation is 100%). For example, as a first effect, a character may be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 may emit light in a predetermined manner. Also, as the first effect, a predetermined effect sound (for example, a character's voice or other effect sound) may be output from the speaker 24 . Also, as the first effect, an effect suggesting the possibility of a set value related to the probability of a big win may be performed. For example, an effect suggesting that the set value related to the jackpot probability is high (that is, the jackpot probability is high) may be executed as the first effect. Further, as the first effect, an effect indicating determination of a set value related to the probability of a big win may be performed. For example, an effect that definitely notifies that the set value related to the jackpot probability is "6" (100%) may be executed as the first effect.

During execution of the first effect, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. That is, the BGM1 output before execution of the first effect is output during the execution of the first effect, and the BGM1 is output even after the end of the first effect. Here, during the execution of the first effect, the volume of the BGM1 may be the same as before and after the execution of the first effect, or may be lower than before and after the execution of the first effect. For example, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect or a character's voice) relating to the first effect may be output while the first effect is being executed, and the volume of the BGM 1 may be lowered while the effect sound is being output. For example, the volume value (channel volume value described later) of each sound output from the speaker 24 can be set from "0 (mute)" to "10". The volume value of BGM1 may be set to "5" before execution of the first effect, and the volume value of BGM1 may be set to "3" during execution of the first effect. Then, when the first effect ends, the volume value of BGM1 may be set to "5", which is the same as before the execution of the first effect. It should be noted that while the first effect is being executed, the reproduction of BGM1 is continued internally, but the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0". For example, the volume value of BGM1 is set to "5" before execution of the first effect, the volume value of BGM1 is set to "0" during execution of the first effect, and the volume value of BGM1 is set to "0" when the first effect ends. The value may be set back to '5'.

Thus, even when the first effect is performed during the pre-reach effect, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced. Therefore, even when the first performance is performed or not performed, the performance can be progressed without breaking the rhythm during the pre-reach performance, and the rhythm of the music and the progress of the performance can be matched. can be done.

The first effect may be performed during execution of the N reach effect (time points T1 to T2), or the first effect may be performed over the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect. Further, the first effect may be performed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (time points T3 to T4). Also, the timing at which the first effect is executed may be determined arbitrarily. For example, based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, the production pattern of the variable production including the pre-reach production, the N-reach production, and the SPSP ready-to-win production is determined, and whether or not the first production is performed based on the determined production pattern, The timing of performing the first effect is determined by lottery. When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability of determining the performance pattern of the variable performance accompanied by the first performance may be higher than the probability of determining the performance pattern of the variable performance not accompanied by the first performance. The timing of performing the first production may be any during the ready-to-win production (points T0 to T1), any during the N-reach production (points T1 to T2), or an SPSP development production. It may be any of the middle (time points T2 to T3) or any of the SPSP ready-to-win presentation (time points T3 to T4).

As shown in FIG. 39, when the N-reach effect is executed, BGM1 is stopped and BGM2 is output. In addition, when the N-reach effect ends and the SPSP-reach effect is executed, the reproduction and output of BGM4 are started. The BGM output start timing at this time is as described above. That is, at time T1, the BGM1 is stopped and the reach establishment sound is output, and after the reach establishment sound is output, the BGM2 is output. At time T2, the BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, the SPSP development sound is output, and after the SPSP development effect is performed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started and the output of the BGM4 is started.

During the SPSP ready-to-win effect, BGM4 is continuously output. The first effect may be performed even during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. For example, while the SPSP ready-to-win animation effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, a predetermined cut-in image may be displayed on the entire screen as the first effect. The reproduction and output of BGM4 are continued even during the execution of this first effect. The volume of the BGM4 may be lowered during the execution of the first effect, or the volume value of the BGM4 may be set to "0" while the reproduction of the BGM4 is continued. For example, before execution of the first effect, the volume value of BGM4 is set to "8" (volume higher than BGM1 and 2), and during execution of the first effect, the volume value of BGM4 is set to "3" or "0 ( mute)” is set, and after the execution of the first effect, the volume value may be returned to the original volume value “8”.

Thereafter, at time T4 at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win presentation, a big hit notification presentation is performed. The BGM 4 is stopped when the big win notification effect is performed. Specifically, as described above, the BGM 4 stops immediately before the start of the big win notification effect. At this time, BGM4 is not reproduced internally. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the BGM 4 stops, a big win notification effect is executed, and a big win notification sound for informing a big win is output. The volume of this jackpot notification sound is higher than the volume of BGM4 that was output until just before. Further, after BGM4 is stopped and the jackpot notification sound is output, BGM5 following BGM4 may be output. That is, the BGM4 may be stopped immediately before the start of the big win notification effect, the big win notification sound may be output in response to the start of the big win notification effect, and then the BGM5 following the BGM4 may be reproduced and output. The volume of this BGM5 may be larger than, the same as, or smaller than the volume of the BGM4 output immediately before the big win notification effect. After that, at the time point T5, the variable effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbols.

In this way, when the big win notification performance is performed, the BGM output until just before can be stopped to emphasize the big win notification performance and to make the player pay attention to the big win notification performance. Therefore, the player's expectation and satisfaction can be enhanced.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the playback position of BGM at the time when each effect is started. In addition, in FIG. 40, the case where the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit will be explained, but when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the reach-loss notification effect is performed instead of the big win notification effect. Similar to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 40(A), at time T0, the special symbols start to change, and the changing effect starts. The BGM1 is started to be reproduced from the start time T0 of the variable effect. BGM1 is music having a playback time of sx seconds (for example, 10 seconds). The beginning of BGM1 (at the start of reproduction: when the reproduction time is 0 seconds) is denoted as "s0". When sx seconds have elapsed since the start of reproduction of BGM1, BGM1 is reproduced again from the beginning. Here, the first effect may start when s1 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) have elapsed from the beginning of BGM1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40(B), the first effect may start when s2 seconds (for example, 8 seconds) have elapsed from the beginning of BGM1. Further, as shown in FIG. 40(C), BGM1 may be reproduced before the variable effect is started at time T0. In this case, the first effect may start when s3 seconds (for example, 3 seconds) have elapsed from the beginning of BGM1.

Thus, the first effect can be started at a random reproduction position in BGM1 (elapsed time from the beginning of BGM1). Even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same, the first effect is started at a random reproduction position in BGM1. For example, if the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in a certain special symbol determination, and the first effect is started when s1 time elapses from the beginning of the BGM1, the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in another special symbol determination. is selected, and the first effect may be started when s2 time has elapsed from the beginning of BGM1.

On the other hand, SPSP ready-to-win production is performed at time T3 when a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of the special symbols. When the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, BGM4 is reproduced and output. BGM4 is music having a playback time of sy seconds longer than sx seconds. BGM4 is started to be reproduced from its beginning. The beginning of BGM4 is written as "r0". When r1 time (for example, 50 seconds) elapses from the start of reproduction of BGM4, BGM4 is stopped, and a jackpot notification effect is performed. The jackpot notification effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in BGM4 (elapsed time (r1) from the beginning of BGM4). Specifically, since the BGM4 is stopped immediately before the start of the jackpot notification effect, the BGM4 is stopped after being reproduced from r0 to r1, and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the stop of the BGM4. At that time, the jackpot notification effect is started.

That is, when the variation patterns of the special symbols are the same, when the reproduction of BGM4 progresses to the position of r1 in BGM4, the jackpot notification effect is started. For example, the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in a certain special symbol determination, and when r1 time elapses from the beginning of the BGM4, the BGM4 is stopped and the jackpot notification effect is started. Also, when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in another special symbol determination, the BGM4 is stopped when r1 time elapses from the beginning of the BGM4, and the big hit notification effect is started.

Thus, the first effect is started at a random reproduction position in the BGM (elapsed time from the beginning of the BGM). Since the first performance is started at random while the BGM is flowing in a rhythmic manner, the performance can be made unexpected and the interest can be improved.

On the other hand, since the big win notification effect is started at a fixed playback position of the BGM (for example, the end of the BGM), the player can be made to recognize the timing at which the big win notification effect is performed by the music, and the music can be played according to the flow of the music. It is possible to heighten the player's expectation. Since the BGM is stopped immediately before the start of the big win notification performance, the game becomes quiet for a moment by stopping the BGM, and the player's expectation can be heightened just before the big win notification performance is performed.

When the variation patterns of the special symbols are different, different types of BGM4 are output, the BGM4 is stopped at different reproduction positions of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. For example, when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in a certain special symbol determination, the BGM4 is stopped when r1 time elapses from the beginning of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. Further, when the variation pattern OP4-2 is selected in another special symbol determination, the BGM4 is stopped when r2 time (time longer than r1) elapses from the beginning of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. Different types of BGM4 may be output during the SPSP ready-to-win effect depending on whether the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected or the variation pattern OP4-2 is selected.

By varying the fixed reproduction position where the BGM stops (the position where the big win notification effect is started) depending on the fluctuation pattern, the length of the special pattern fluctuation time (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win) is given to the player depending on how far the music has progressed. ) can be recognized, and the degree of expectation for the jackpot can be recognized.

Next, a case where a premium effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is performed as the first effect will be described.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when a premium effect is executed while BGM1 is being output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 41, the variation of the special symbols is started, and the pre-reach production is performed. During the pre-reach performance, BGM1 is output. There are times when a premium effect is executed at time t1 during the pre-reach effect. The premium effect is a confirmation effect that suggests that a jackpot game is to be executed (that is, confirmation of a jackpot), and has an extremely low appearance frequency (eg, 1/10000). For example, a premium effect is displayed by displaying a premium image (an image of a premium character, an image of a premium pattern, etc.) on the liquid crystal display device 5, or by displaying a color (for example, rainbow color) on the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 indicating that the big win is confirmed. ) to emit light. In addition, the premium effect may be an effect in which the movable accessory 7 is operated in a predetermined mode as an effect suggesting that a big win is confirmed, or an effect in which the movable accessory 7 is illuminated in a predetermined mode. . Also, the premium effect may be an effect in which a performance accessory different from the movable accessory 7 is caused to operate in a predetermined manner or to emit light in a predetermined manner. Also, the premium effect may be an effect of displaying the decorative patterns 51 in a manner suggesting the determination of the big win (for example, a specific combination of the decorative patterns 51, display of a specific pattern). Also, the premium effect may be an effect of outputting a sound suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output while the premium effect is being performed. For example, the volume of BGM1 during the premium effect may be the same as before and after the performance of the premium effect, or may be lower than before and after the performance of the premium effect. Further, while the reproduction of BGM1 is continued internally during the premium effect (although the reproduction position advances as time passes), the volume value of BGM1 may be set to "0". Also, during the premium effect, for example, the voice of the premium character or the sound effect indicating the determination of the jackpot may be output. Even if the volume of BGM1 is lowered during the premiere presentation, the volume of BGM1 is restored after the premiere presentation. That is, the type and volume of BGM1 do not change before and after the premiere effect. Note that after the premiere presentation, the volume of the BGM1 may be lowered or raised, or a different type of BGM1 may be output.

Note that the premium production may be executed during the N-reach production (time points T1 to T2), may be executed during the SPSP development production (time points T2 to T3), or may be executed during the SPSP ready-to-reach production (time points T3 to T4). Also, the premium effect may be performed multiple times in one variation of the special symbol. For example, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and during the N-reach production, the premium production may be performed. Also in this case, the BGM is continuously reproduced and output during execution of each premium effect. Also, there may be a premium effect in which the BGM is continued and a premium effect in which the BGM is stopped.

After the premier performance is performed in the pre-reach performance, BGM1 is stopped when reach is achieved, and BGM2 is output while the N reach performance is started. After that, the BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Output of BGM4 is started when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Then, BGM 4 is stopped just before the big win notification effect is executed in the same manner as described above. At this time, BGM4 is not reproduced internally. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the BGM 4 stops, a big win notification effect is performed, and a big win notification sound for informing the big win is output. The volume of this jackpot notification sound is higher than the volume of BGM4 that was output until just before. Further, after BGM4 is stopped and the jackpot notification sound is output, BGM5 following BGM4 may be output. That is, the BGM4 may be stopped immediately before the start of the big win notification effect, the big win notification sound may be output according to the start of the big win notification effect, and then the BGM5 following the BGM4 may be reproduced and output. The volume of this BGM5 may be larger than, the same as, or smaller than the volume of the BGM4 output immediately before the big win notification effect. After that, at the time point T5, the variable effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

In this way, even when the premium effect suggesting the determination of the big win is executed while the BGM1 is being output, the BGM1 is continuously output as in the case where the premium effect is not executed. In addition, BGM4 is stopped in the final big win notification effect regardless of whether the premium effect is executed or not.

Therefore, the performance can be progressed along with the flow of the music until the last big win notification performance, and the continuity of the performance can be maintained. On the other hand, by stopping the music in the last big win notification effect, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation and emphasize the big win notification effect.

Note that the premium effect may be performed together with other advance notice effects. Here, ``both the premiere effect and another preview effect are performed'' means that another preview effect is performed while the premiere effect is being performed, and that another preview effect is performed after the premiere effect is performed. , and execution of other advance notice effects before execution of the premiere effect. In other words, as long as an effect is performed in such a manner that the premier effect and the other forewarning effect have some relevance, the premier effect and the other forenow effect need not necessarily be performed at the same time. For example, during the premium effect, the liquid crystal display device 5 may display a premium character that constitutes the premium effect and another character that does not constitute the premium effect. In this way, it may be determined by lottery of the effect control unit 130 whether or not the premium effect is performed in combination with other advance notice effects. When it is decided that the premiere effect will be performed in combination with other advance notice effects, the premiere effect and other advance notice effects are executed together, and it is not decided to perform the premiere effect in combination with other advance notice effects. In this case, only the premium effect is executed. On the other hand, the jackpot notification effect is not performed together with the other advance notice effect that may be performed in combination with the premium effect. That is, the jackpot notification effect is not performed in combination with the other notice effect that may be performed in combination with the premium effect.

Also, in the jackpot notification effect, the effect may be performed using more effect means than the effect means used in the premium effect. For example, in the premium performance, a premium performance is performed using (the image displayed on) the liquid crystal display device 5, (the sound from) the speaker 24, and either the board lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37, and the jackpot is achieved. In the notification effect, in addition to both the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, the movable accessory 7 may be used to notify the jackpot.

Incidentally, in the jackpot notification effect, a more decorative effect than the premium effect is performed. Here, the highly decorative performance is a performance that looks flashy to the player. For example, in the last big hit notification effect of the variable effect, the movable accessory 7 is operated and an image suggesting the determination of the big win is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. An image suggesting the determination of the jackpot may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 without the accessory 7 operating. In addition, in the jackpot notification effect, a louder sound may be output than when the premium effect is executed, a flashy sound (for example, a high-pitched sound) may be output, or a long sound may be output. good.

Also, a premium effect may be performed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. For example, as a premium effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect, a cut-in image suggesting the determination of a big win may be displayed on the full screen. In this case, during the premium effect, the BGM that has been output until immediately before the premium effect may be continued to be output. The volume of the BGM during the premium presentation may be the same as that immediately before the premiere presentation, or may be lowered. Further, during the premium presentation, the BGM may continue to be reproduced, but its volume value may be set to "0".

Whether or not to execute the premium effect is determined by the effect control section 130 based on the variation pattern of the special symbols. Specifically, when receiving a variation start command from the game control unit 100, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute a premium effect based on the variation pattern included in the variation start command, by generating a random number. Determined by the lottery used. In this case, the shorter the variation time of the special symbols, the higher the rate at which the premium effect is executed. For example, when the variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, the rate of execution of the premium effect may be higher than when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected. Also, when the variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, the proportion of executing the premium effect may be higher than when the variation pattern OP3-1 is selected. For example, there are a first table and a second table for determining whether or not to execute the premium effect, and the ratio of executing the premium effect differs depending on which table is used for the lottery. For example, when a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, a lottery is performed using the first table, and when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, a lottery is performed using the second table. will be When the lottery is performed using the first table, the ratio of determination to execute the premium presentation is relatively high, and when the lottery is performed using the second table, it is determined to perform the premium presentation. Relatively low percentage. In addition, when the lottery is performed using the first table, the percentage of determination to execute the premium effect may be 100%. For example, when a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, the rate at which the effect pattern of the variable effect including the premium effect is determined is higher than the rate at which the effect pattern of the variable effect not including the premium effect is determined. may Further, when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, the ratio of determining the effect pattern of the variable effect including the premium effect is lower than the ratio of determining the effect pattern of the variable effect not including the premium effect. may

Some players find the performance annoying if the performance continues for a long time after the performance of the premium performance suggesting the confirmation of the big win. However, the shorter the variable time, the higher the rate at which the premium effect is executed, so that the variable effect ends in a relatively short time after the premium effect is executed, and the jackpot game is performed. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such annoyance. In this case, the BGM may be switched after the premium effect is executed (or while the premium effect is being executed). For example, BGM1 and BGM2, which are the first half of the music, may be output before the premiere effect is executed, and the second half of the music (for example, BGM5) may be output after the premiere effect is executed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the music even if the fluctuation time is short. Note that when a specific variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, the premium effect may be executed at a rate of 100%. Further, contrary to the above, the longer the variation time of the special symbols, the higher the rate at which the premium effect is executed. Moreover, when a specific variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, the premium effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

Next, a description will be given of a case where an operation prompting effect for prompting the player to operate the operating means is performed immediately before the last big win notification effect.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when an operation prompting effect is executed immediately before the final big win notification effect in the effect pattern of FIG. 41 when the result of special symbol determination is a big win.

As shown in FIG. 42, for example, a premium effect may be executed during the pre-reach effect. During the premium effect, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. Since the premium effect in FIG. 42 is the same as the premium effect in FIG. 41, the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42, at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect (hereinafter referred to as a second operation promotion effect) may be performed. Here, the operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means. The presence or absence of the second operation promotion effect may be determined by the effect control unit 130 performing a lottery using random numbers based on the variation pattern of the special symbols. Further, the presence or absence of the second operation promotion effect may be determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and when a certain variation pattern is selected, the second operation promotion effect is always performed, and another variation pattern is selected. In that case, the second operation prompting effect may not be performed.

For example, at time t2 (for example, 8 seconds before time T4) before the jackpot notification effect is started, the second operation promotion effect is started. The second operation promoting effect is a effect that is performed immediately before the big hit notification effect (or reach-losing notification effect) is executed, and is, for example, an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28 as an example of the operating means. . For example, during the second operation promotion effect, an image simulating the effect lever 28 and an image showing an operation valid period during which the player's operation is valid are displayed. Moreover, the production lever 28 itself may emit light by emitting light from the LED built in the production lever 28 during the second operation promotion production. Further, during the second operation promoting effect, the effect lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect lever 28 . When the effect lever 28 vibrates during the second operation promotion effect, the possibility that the big win notification effect is performed after that may be 100%, or when the effect lever 28 vibrates during the second operation promotion effect. , the possibility that the big hit notification effect will be performed may be higher than when the effect lever 28 does not vibrate during the second operation promotion effect.

When the result of the special symbol determination is a big win, when the production lever 28 is operated during the second operation promotion production, a big win notification production is performed according to the operation. In addition, during the second operation promotion performance, an operation valid period during which the operation to the performance lever 28 is effective is set, and when the operation valid period elapses without the performance lever 28 being operated, a big hit notification performance is performed. The performance lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibration motor) incorporated in the performance lever 28 during the jackpot notification performance.

When the second operation promoting performance for prompting the operation of the performance lever 28 is performed at the final stage of the SPSP ready-to-win performance, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot notification performance is performed after that than when the second operation promoting performance is not performed. For example, when the second operation promotion effect is performed, the possibility (expectation level) of a big win after that is 50% or more, and when the second operation promotion effect is not performed, the possibility of a big win after that. may be 35%. It should be noted that a second operation prompting effect suggesting that a big win is confirmed (expectation level is 100%) may be performed.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a ready-to-win failure notification effect is performed according to the operation of the effect lever 28 during the second operation promotion effect or according to the lapse of the operation effective period.

When the second operation prompting effect is executed at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the BGM4 output during the SPSP ready-to-win effect is stopped. The BGM 4 is also stopped during the jackpot notification effect after the second operation promotion effect. The control of the BGM when the second operation prompting effect is executed will be described below.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of control of the second operation promotion effect and BGM at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect of FIG. FIG. 43(A) is a diagram showing an example in which BGM4 is stopped during the operation valid period, FIG. 43(B) is a diagram showing an example in which BGM4 is stopped during the operation preparation period, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing an example in which BGM4 is stopped before the operation preparation period.

As shown in FIG. 43, the second operation promotion effect is divided into an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect lever 28 is valid and an operation preparation period (before the operation valid period). At time t2, the operation preparation period for the second operation promotion effect starts. The operation preparation period is a period in which the player prepares to operate the effect lever 28, after which an effect is performed to suggest that the operation of the effect lever 28 will be effective. For example, an image imitating a part of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and an effect suggesting the possibility that an image imitating the entire effect lever 28 is displayed is performed. An example of the effect during the operation preparation period will be described later.

At time t3 when the operation preparation period has elapsed from time t2, the operation effective period starts. During the operation valid period, an effect is produced to indicate that the operation of the effect lever 28 is valid. For example, an image showing the effective period of the operation is displayed together with an image simulating the entire production lever 28 . In addition, during the operation effective period, the effect lever 28 itself may emit light by emitting light from the LED incorporated in the effect lever 28 . Moreover, during the operation effective period, the production lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibration motor) built in the production lever 28 . An example of the effect during the operation valid period will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 43A, BGM4 may be output until time t3 when the operation preparation period elapses even if the second operation prompting effect is started at time t2. BGM4 is stopped at the timing when the valid operation period starts at time t3. After time t3, BGM4 remains stopped. Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period elapses), a big hit notification effect is performed at time T4. In the jackpot notification performance, a jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output from the speaker 24 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 43(B), BGM4 may be stopped at the timing when the operation preparation period of the second operation promotion effect starts at time t2. After time t2, BGM4 remains stopped. At time t3 when the operation preparation period has elapsed, the operation effective period starts. Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period elapses), a big hit notification effect is performed at time T4. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification sound is output from the speaker 24 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 43(C), BGM4 may be stopped at time t4 immediately before the operation preparation period for the second operation promotion effect starts. For example, BGM4 may stop one second before the operation preparation period starts. After time t4, BGM4 remains stopped. After BGM4 is stopped at time t4, an operation preparation period for the second operation promotion effect is started at time t2. After that, at time t3 when the operation preparation period has elapsed, the operation effective period starts. Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period elapses), a big hit notification effect is performed at time T4. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification sound is output from the speaker 24 .

In addition, in FIGS. 43A to 43C, a sound prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 (hereinafter referred to as a second operation guidance sound) may be output during the second operation promotion effect. For example, during the operation preparation period, the second operation guidance sound (for example, the sound "Pull the lever") may be output. Also, the second operation guidance sound may be output during the operation valid period. Also, during the valid operation period, the sound may be restricted. The sound-restricted state may be a completely silent state or a state in which relatively low sound is output. For example, while relatively loud sounds such as BGM, jackpot notification sound, and second operation guidance sound are not output, the effective period image 81 (described later) displays how the remaining time of the effective operation period decreases, A sound effect indicating the reduction of the operation effective period may be output at a relatively low volume.

Note that, as described above, an error sound is output when the gaming machine 1 detects an error even in the sound restricted state. Also, in this sound restricted state, the predetermined winning sound that is output when the game ball wins the starting hole may not be output. In addition, even in the sound restricted state, a relatively loud predetermined winning sound that is output when the game ball enters the starting hole may be output. In this case, the winning sound may or may not be output based on the result of the preliminary determination. For example, when there is a prize in the starting hole of the game ball in the sound restricted state, when the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, the reservation display 52 is "red" or "gold") is displayed), a winning sound is output, and even if the game ball enters the starting hole in the sound restricted state, when the expectation is low (for example, the pending display 52 is displayed in normal "white") sometimes), the winning sound may not be output.

Also, a blackout effect may be performed during the second operation promotion effect. For example, the operation valid period may start after the blackout effect is performed. Further, a blackout effect may be performed in which images other than the image simulating the effect lever 28 and the image indicating the operation valid period are darkened during the operation valid period.

Further, in the present embodiment, BGM control during the second operation prompting effect may be performed by any one of FIGS. 43(A) to 43(C). Also, it may be determined by a lottery which of FIGS. 43A to 43C should be used for BGM control. Further, the degree of expectation for a big win after that may differ depending on which of FIGS. 43(A) to (C) control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, there are times when the second operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the last big win notification effect of the variable effect and when it is not performed. BGM4 is stopped during the second operation promotion presentation. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final big win notification effect, and the player can concentrate on the operation of the effect lever 28.例文帳に追加In addition, when the sound restriction state (completely silent state or a state in which only a relatively small sound is output) is set during the second operation prompting effect (for example, during the operation valid period), the player is more attracted. You can concentrate on your work. By setting the sound limited state before operating the performance lever 28, the player can imagine a big win after the operation, and the expectation of the player can be further heightened. Further, similarly to the above, the second operation prompting effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in BGM4 (the fixed reproduction position (elapsed time from the beginning of BGM) differs depending on the variation pattern). Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is performed by the music, and the player's sense of expectation can be heightened according to the flow of the music.

On the other hand, for example, during the pre-reach performance, there are times when a premium performance suggesting the determination of a big win is performed and when it is not performed. BGM1 is continuously output even when the premium presentation is performed. Therefore, regardless of whether the premiere performance is performed or not, the performance can be progressed with the same rhythm during the pre-reach performance, and the rhythm of the music and the progress of the performance can be matched. In addition, as in the above, the premiere effect is started at a random reproduction position in BGM1 when BGM1 is flowing in a rhythmic manner, so that the effect can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved. can be done.

Next, a case will be described where the first operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the premium effect and the second operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the last big win notification effect.

FIG. 44 shows BGM when the first operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the premium effect and the second operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the last big win notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win. is a diagram showing an example of control of.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the premium effect. The first operation prompting effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means. For example, the first operation-promoting effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26, and is an effect with a lower degree of expectation for a big win than the second operation-promoting effect. After the variable production is started at time T0, for example, during the pre-reach production, the first operation promotion production is performed. Specifically, at time t5 (for example, 3 seconds before time t1) before the premium effect is executed, the first operation promotion effect is executed.

In the first operation promotion effect, for example, an image simulating the effect button 26 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and an image indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 26 is output. When the effect button 26 is pressed during the operation valid period, the premium effect is executed. It should be noted that if the effect button 26 is not pressed during the valid operation period, the subsequent premium effect may not be executed. Moreover, regardless of whether or not the effect button 26 is operated, the premium effect may be executed according to the lapse of the operation effective period.

Note that, during the first operation promotion effect, the effect button 26 itself may emit light by emitting light from the LED built into the effect button 26 . Further, during the first operation promoting effect, the effect button 26 itself may vibrate by operating a vibrator (vibrating motor) built in the effect button 26 . When the performance button 26 vibrates during the first operation promotion performance, the possibility of performing the premium performance after the operation may be higher than when the performance button 26 does not vibrate during the first operation promotion performance.

BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output during execution of the first operation promotion effect. For example, the volume of the BGM1 during the first operation-promoting effect may be the same as before execution of the first operation-promoting effect, or may be lower than before execution of the first operation-promoting effect. Also, while the BGM1 continues to be played back internally during the first operation-promoting effect (although the playback position advances as time elapses), the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0".

Further, during the first operation promotion effect, a first operation guidance sound may be output to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26 . The first operation guide sound may be a different sound from the second operation guide sound. For example, the first operation guide sound may be an electronic sound. Also, the first operation guide sound may be shorter than the second operation guide sound. Also, the volume of the first operation guide sound may be lower than the volume of the second operation guide sound. Also, the first operation guide sound may be the same sound as the second operation guide sound. Also, while the first operation guide sound may or may not be output, the second operation guide sound may always be output.

Note that the first operation promotion effect may be an effect prompting the player to operate the effect lever 28 . In addition, as the first operation promotion effect, there are an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 and an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28, and these may be selected by lottery. In this case, when the effect prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promoting effect, the premium is performed later than when the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 26 is executed as the first operation promoting effect. It may be configured such that the effect is easily executed. Note that when an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, the premium effect may be executed with a probability of 100%.

In this way, the first operation promotion effect performed immediately before the premium effect is a effect to encourage the operation in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion effect performed immediately before the last big win notification effect of the variable effect, This is an effect that prompts an operation in a second operation mode that is different from the first operation mode. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 26 (first operation mode), and the second operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the user to pull the effect lever 28 (second operation mode). Also, for example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 26, and the second operation promotion effect causes the player to press and hold the effect button 26 (the button is held down for a predetermined time). It may be a performance for the purpose.

In this way, the BGM1 is continuously output regardless of whether or not the first operation promotion effect is performed during the variable effect. Therefore, even when the first operation promoting effect is performed and when the first operation promoting effect is not performed, the effect can be progressed with the same rhythm during the pre-reach effect, and the rhythm of the music and the progress of the effect can be combined. can be matched. Also, the premium effect is started at a random reproduction position in BGM1, and the first operation promotion effect is also started at a random reproduction position in BGM1. Therefore, when the BGM1 is playing rhythmically, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the performance, thereby improving the interest.

On the other hand, BGM4 is stopped during the second operation promotion effect immediately before the last big win notification effect. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final big win notification effect, and the player can concentrate on the operation of the effect lever 28.例文帳に追加Further, when the sound restriction state is set during the second operation promotion effect (for example, during the valid operation period), the player can concentrate on the operation. By setting the sound limited state before operating the performance lever 28, the player can imagine a big win after the operation, and the expectation of the player can be further heightened. Also, the second operation prompting effect is started at a fixed playback position in BGM4 (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the beginning. The predetermined time varies depending on the variation pattern). Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is performed by the music, and the player's sense of expectation can be heightened according to the flow of the music.

In the present embodiment, there are times during the variable effect when the advance notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big win is performed and when it is not performed. A case will be described below in which an announcement effect suggesting the possibility of a big win is performed while BGM1 is being output.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of control of the BGM when the advance notice effect is executed while the BGM1 is being output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win.

As shown in FIG. 45, the special symbols start to change, and the pre-reach production is performed. During the pre-reach performance, BGM1 is output. At time t1 during the pre-reach performance, there are times when the advance notice performance is executed. The advance notice effect is a effect that suggests the possibility (expectation) of a big hit. There are a plurality of types of advance notice effects in the advance notice effects. For example, as the notice effect, a effect in which a predetermined character is displayed, a dialogue effect in which a predetermined character utters a line, a step-up notice effect in which the degree of expectation increases in stages, a notice effect using the decorative pattern 51, and a pseudo-continuous effect. There are a notice, a notice effect using the movable accessory 7, and the like. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs for each type of advance notice effect. Further, as the advance notice effect, during-fluctuation change effect in which the during-change display 53 changes may be executed. Also, the advance notice effect may be a effect suggesting a set value related to the probability of a big win.

Note that the advance notice effect may be performed during the N reach effect, may be performed during the SPSP development effect, or may be performed during the SPSP reach effect. Also, the advance notice effect may be performed a plurality of times in one variation effect. For example, the notice effect may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols and during the N reach effect. Not limited to these timings, the notice effect may be performed at any timing from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of fluctuation.

BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output while the advance notice effect is being performed. For example, the volume of BGM1 during the announcement effect may be the same as before and after execution of the announcement effect, or may be lower than before and after execution of the announcement effect. Also, while BGM1 continues to be played back internally during the announcement effect (although the playback position advances as time passes), the volume value of BGM1 may be set to "0". Also, during the announcement effect, for example, the voice of the character or the sound effect may be output. Even if the volume of the BGM1 is lowered during the announcement presentation, the volume of the BGM1 is restored after the announcement presentation. That is, the type and volume of BGM1 do not change before and after the announcement effect. It should be noted that after the announcement effect, the volume of the BGM1 may be lowered or raised, or a different type of BGM1 may be output.

Also, the volume of the BGM 1 during the notice effect may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the notice effect. For example, the volume of the BGM 1 during the preview effect may be decreased or increased as the degree of expectation of the preview effect is higher.

After the advance notice effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 45, reach is established, BGM1 is stopped, N reach effect is started, and BGM2 is started to be output. After that, the BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Output of BGM4 is started when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Then, in the same manner as described above, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the big win notification effect is executed at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and the big win notification effect is performed.

In this way, even when the advance notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big win is executed, the BGM1 is continuously output in the same manner as when the advance notice effect is not executed. In addition, BGM4 is stopped in the last big win notification effect regardless of whether the advance notice effect is executed or not.

Therefore, the performance can be progressed along with the flow of the music until the last big win notification performance, and the continuity of the performance can be maintained. On the other hand, by stopping the music in the last big win notification effect, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation and emphasize the big win notification effect.

Note that a certain advance notice effect may be performed together with another notice effect and may not be performed together with another notice effect. In other words, a certain foretelling effect may be performed in combination with another foretelling effect and may not be performed in combination with another foretelling effect. Here, "a certain advance notice effect and another notice effect are performed together (a certain notice effect and another notice effect are combined)" means that another notice effect is executed while a certain notice effect is being executed. Execution of another notice effect after execution of a certain notice effect, and execution of another notice effect before execution of a certain notice effect are included. That is, as long as the performance is performed in such a manner that there is some relevance between a certain foretelling effect and another foretelling effect, one foretelling effect and another foretelling effect do not necessarily have to be performed at the same time. For example, during the first notice effect, a first character that is part of the first notice effect is displayed, and during the display of the first character, a second character indicating the second notice effect is displayed. There may be times when it is not displayed. On the other hand, the second notice effect, which may be performed in combination with the first notice effect, is not performed during the jackpot notification effect. That is, the jackpot notification effect is not executed together with the second advance notice effect. It should be noted that whether or not the first notice effect is combined with the second notice effect is determined by lottery of the effect control section 130. - 特許庁For example, a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the first notice effect and a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the second notice effect may be performed independently, or whether or not to execute the first notice effect. A lottery as to whether or not to execute the second advance notice effect may be performed based on the lottery result. The degree of expectation for big win may be the same or different between the case where the first notice effect and the second notice effect are performed in combination and the case where they are not performed in combination. For example, if the degree of expectation for the first notice effect is 10% and the degree of expectation for the second notice effect is 20%, the degree of expectation when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are combined is , higher than the higher expectation (20%) of the first and second notice effects. For example, when the first and second notice effects are combined, the expectation is 30%. may Conversely, depending on the combination of advance notice effects, the degree of expectation may be lowered. For example, when the expectation level of the first notice effect is 10% and the expectation level of the second notice effect is 20%, the expectation level when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are performed in combination may be lower than the higher expectation (20%), for example 15%.

Also, in the jackpot notification effect, the effect is performed using more effect means than the effect means used in the advance notice effect. For example, in the announcement effect, the effect is performed using (the image displayed on) the liquid crystal display device 5, and in the jackpot notification effect, the liquid crystal display device 5, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the movable accessory 7 are used. An effect for notifying a jackpot may be performed. Also, in the advance notice effect, the effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 (sound from), and in the jackpot notification effect, the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, and the movable role An effect of notifying a big win using the object 7 may be performed. Incidentally, in the jackpot notification effect, any effect may be performed without being limited to the number of effect means as long as the effect is more decorative than the advance notice effect.

Next, a case will be described where the first operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the advance notice effect and the second operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the last big win notification effect.

FIG. 46 shows BGM when the first operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the advance notice effect and the second operation promoting effect is performed immediately before the last big win notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. is a diagram showing an example of control of.

The second operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28 . The second operation prompting effect is the same effect as the second operation prompting effect in FIG. 42, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 46, the first operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the advance notice effect. The first operation prompting effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means. For example, the first operation-promoting effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26, and is an effect with a lower degree of expectation than the second operation-promoting effect. After the variable production is started at time T0, for example, during the pre-reach production, the first operation promotion production is performed. Specifically, at time t5 (for example, 3 seconds before time t1) before the announcement effect is executed, the first operation promotion effect is executed.

For example, in the first operation promotion effect, an image simulating the effect button 26 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and an image indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 26 is output. When the effect button 26 is pressed during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is executed. Note that if the effect button 26 is not pressed during the effective period of operation, the subsequent advance notice effect may not be executed, or the advance notice effect may be executed according to the lapse of the effective operation period. For example, when it is determined that a notice effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is to be executed, the notice effect may not be executed when the effect button 26 is not pressed during the valid operation period. On the other hand, when it is determined that a notice effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is to be executed, when the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation effective period, the notice effect is executed according to the lapse of the operation effective period. may

Note that the first operation prompting effect of FIG. 46 may be the same effect as the first operation prompting effect of FIG. 44, or may be a different mode of effect. For example, when the premium effect of FIG. 44 is executed, the effect button 26 may emit light or vibrate in a specific manner in the first operation promotion effect. On the other hand, when the advance notice effect of FIG. 46 is executed, the effect button 26 does not need to emit light in a specific manner and vibrate in the first operation promoting effect.

BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output during execution of the first operation promotion effect. For example, the volume of the BGM1 during the first operation-promoting effect may be the same as before execution of the first operation-promoting effect, or may be lower than before execution of the first operation-promoting effect. Also, while the BGM1 continues to be played back internally during the first operation-promoting effect (although the playback position advances as time elapses), the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0".

Further, during the first operation promotion effect, a first operation guidance sound may be output to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26 . The first operation guide sound may be a different sound from the second operation guide sound. For example, during the first operation prompting effect, a sound effect (for example, an electronic sound) prompting the operation of the effect button 26 is output, and during the second operation prompting effect, a different sound (for example, a character's voice) is output. ”, etc.) may be output. The effect after the advance notice effect is the same as in FIGS. 41 and 42, so the description is omitted. Also, the first operation guide sound may be the same sound as the second operation guide sound.

Note that the first operation promoting effect executed immediately before the advance notice effect may be an effect prompting the player to operate the effect lever 28 in the same manner as the second operation promoting effect executed immediately before the big win notification effect. . In addition, as the first operation promotion effect, there are an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 and an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28, and these may be selected by lottery. In this case, when the effect prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promoting effect, the expectation is higher than when the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 26 is executed as the first operation promoting effect. It may be configured such that a high degree of advance notice effect is easily executed. In addition, when an effect prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, a high-expectation advance notice effect may be executed after that with a probability of 100%.

The first operation promotion performance executed immediately before the notice performance is a performance prompting the operation in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion performance executed immediately before the jackpot notification performance is different from the first operation mode. This is an effect for prompting an operation in the second operation mode. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 26 (first operation mode), and the second operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the user to pull the effect lever 28 (second operation mode). Also, for example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 26, and the second operation promotion effect is for causing the player to press and hold the effect button 26 (to keep the button pressed). It can be a performance.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 46, the BGM is continuously reproduced during the first operation-promoting effect, and the BGM that has been output until immediately before is stopped when the second operation-promoting effect is executed. Effects similar to those described with reference can be obtained.

Next, BGM control when an operation prompting effect is performed before the SPSP development effect will be described.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win. FIG. 47 shows the flow of variation effects when a big hit variation pattern (OP4-1 to OP4-3) including the N reach effect and the SPSP reach effect is selected.

As shown in FIG. 47, at time T0, the special symbols are started to change and the pre-ready-to-win effect is performed. BGM1 is output during the pre-reach performance. There are times when the first operation promotion performance is executed during the ready-to-reach performance, and when the operation is performed during the first operation promotion performance, the first performance (the above advance notice performance and premium performance) is sometimes executed. The BGM1 is continuously reproduced even during execution of the first operation promoting effect and the first effect. As described above, during the execution of the first effect, the volume of BGM1 may or may not be lowered, and the reproduction of BGM1 is continued, but the volume value of BGM1 is set to "0". may be Also, during execution of the first effect, other sounds (sound effects and character voices) different from BGM1 may be output.

Subsequently, reach is established at time T1. When reach is established, BGM1 is stopped. When the reach is established and the N-reach effect is started, BGM2 is output.

After the N reach effect is started, the third operation promotion effect is performed at time t6. The third operation promoting effect is a effect performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is executed (for example, 4 seconds before), and is an effect prompting the player to operate the operating means (the effect button 26 or the effect lever 28). . The third operation-promoting effect may be an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the first operation-promoting effect and a lower degree of expectation than the second operation-promoting effect. For example, in the third operation promotion effect, an image imitating the effect button 26 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47, the BGM2 is stopped at the timing when the third operation promotion effect is performed. The reproduction of BGM2 is also stopped internally. During the third operation prompting effect, a third operation guidance sound may be output to prompt the player to operate the operation means. For example, the third operation guide sound is a sound effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 26, and may be different (or the same) as the first operation guide sound. Also, the third operation guide sound may be output at the same volume as the first operation guide sound, or may be output at a volume higher (or lower) than the first operation guide sound.

When the effect button 26 is operated during the third operation promotion effect, or when the operation valid period in the third operation promotion effect elapses, the SPSP development effect is performed (time T2). As described above, the SPSP development effect differs depending on the executed SPSP ready-to-win effect and varies depending on the variation pattern. Also, during the SPSP development presentation, an SPSP development sound is output. Also, BGM2 remains stopped even during the SPSP development presentation.

Note that the blackout effect may be performed during the third operation promoting effect or during the SPSP development effect. For example, as a blackout effect during the third operation promotion effect, a button image 83 imitating the effect button 26 and a validity period image 84 (to be described later) indicating the operation validity period are displayed relatively brightly, and a background image other than these is displayed. , etc. may be displayed relatively darkly. Also, a blackout effect may be performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect. During the blackout effect, the sound may be restricted (a state in which no sound is output, or a state in which only a relatively low volume of sound is output). It should be noted that, when there is a winning to the starting hole of the game ball in this sound restricted state, it is not necessary to output a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the winning, it may be output. In addition, when there is a winning in the starting hole of the game ball in the sound restricted state, there are times when the winning sound is output and times when it is not output depending on the degree of expectation of the big hit pending the special symbol judgment related to the winning. good too.

When the SPSP development effect ends, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started (time T3). BGM4 is output during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At time t2 at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the above-described second operation promotion effect may be performed. For example, BGM4 stops immediately before the second operation promotion effect starts. Also, the second operation guidance sound is output during the second operation prompting effect.

Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the second operation promotion effect, or when the operation effective period in the second operation promotion effect elapses, a win-lose notification effect (jackpot notification effect or reach-losing notification effect) is performed ( time T4).

As the third operation prompting effect, an effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 may be executed. Further, as the third operation prompting effect, one of the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 may be selected by lottery and executed. When the performance prompting the operation of the performance lever 28 is executed as the third operation promotion performance, the SPSP development performance (and the SPSP ready-to-win performance) with a higher degree of expectation than the performance of prompting the operation of the performance button 26 is executed. may be easily performed. For example, when an effect prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the third operation promoting effect, the SPSP development effect C is given at a rate of 80% according to the operation of the effect lever 28 during the third operation promoting effect. Executed, SPSP development production A or B may be executed at a rate of 20%. Further, when an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 26 is executed as the third operation promoting effect, the SPSP development effect C is given at a rate of 20% according to the operation of the effect button 26 during the third operation promoting effect. Executed, SPSP development production A or B may be executed at a rate of 80%. In addition, when an effect prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the third operation promoting effect, the SPSP development effect C is given at a rate of 100% according to the operation of the effect lever 28 during the third operation promoting effect. may be performed. In addition, when the performance prompting the operation of the performance button 26 is executed as the third operation promotion performance, the SPSP development performance C is not executed in response to the operation of the performance button 26 during the third operation promotion performance, and 100 SPSP development effect A or B may be executed at a rate of %.

The third operation promotion effect (and SPSP development effect) may be started at a fixed reproduction position in BGM (for example, 20 seconds from the beginning of BGM). This fixed playback position may vary depending on the variation pattern. For example, when the N reach effect starts, BGM2 may start playing from the beginning, the third operation promotion effect may be executed at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM2, and the SPSP development effect may start according to the operation. Thus, by starting the third operation promotion effect and the SPSP development effect at a fixed playback position in the BGM, the player can be made to recognize the timing at which the SPSP development effect is performed by the music, and the music flows. Accordingly, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened. Note that the third operation prompting effect may be started at a random playback position in BGM2 (for example, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds from the beginning of BGM).

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big win. In FIG. 48, the description of the same parts as in FIG. 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 48, the third operation promotion effect is started at time t6 during the N-reach effect. In this case, the BGM2 is continuously output even during the third operation promotion presentation. Note that when the third operation guidance sound for prompting the player to operate is output during the third operation promotion effect, the volume of the BGM 2 during the third operation promotion effect may be reduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 48, the SPSP development effect is performed and BGM2 is stopped in accordance with the operation during the third operation promotion effect or in accordance with the expiration of the operation effective period of the third operation promotion effect. (Time point T2). Thereafter, an effect similar to that of FIG. 47 is performed.

As described above, various production patterns of variable production have been described, but each of the above production patterns is merely an example, and a part of production may or may not be executed in each production pattern. For example, in FIG. 46, the first operation prompting effect may not be executed, and only the second operation prompting effect may be executed. Further, in FIG. 46, there may be a case where the first operation prompting effect is executed and the second operation prompting effect is not executed.

Further, for example, in FIG. 47, the first and third operation promotion effects may be executed without executing the second operation promotion effect, or the first operation promotion effect may be executed without executing the first operation promotion effect. 3 and the second operation prompting effect may be executed, or the first and second operation prompting effects may not be executed and only the third operation prompting effect may be executed.

(Specific production example)
Next, a specific effect example of the effect based on the effect patterns described above will be described. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 44, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 will be described below.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing specific effects of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 44, and shows an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. As shown in FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), when the special symbols start to fluctuate, a start performance is performed in which the decorative symbols 51 start to fluctuate. If the BGM1 is not output immediately before the special symbol variation starts, the image sound control unit 140 starts reproducing the BGM1 in response to the start of the special symbol variation, and the BGM1 is output from the speaker 24. be. Further, when the BGM1 is being output at the time when the variation of the special symbol is started, the output BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output.

Next, during the variable display of the decorative pattern 51, the first operation prompting effect may be executed (Fig. 49(B), time t5 in Fig. 44). For example, as the first operation promotion effect, a button image 80 imitating the effect button 26 and a validity period image 81 indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 26 are displayed. The valid period image 81 is an image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. For example, the remaining time is displayed by decreasing the white horizontally long image indicating the remaining time as time passes. When the first operation promotion effect is executed, a first operation guidance sound is output to prompt the player to press the effect button 26 . For example, an electronic sound may be output as the first operation guidance sound. Further, during the effective period of operation, the effect button 26 itself may be caused to emit light by causing the LED incorporated in the effect button 26 to emit light.

While the first operation promotion effect is being performed, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. Note that when the first operation guidance sound is output, the volume of the BGM1 may be made smaller than before the first operation guidance sound is output. It should be noted that, during the first operation promoting effect, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, a predetermined winning sound indicating the winning of the game ball entering the starting port may be output as described above. be. Even in this case, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. The volume of the BGM1 may be the same when the predetermined prize-winning sound is output and when the predetermined prize-winning sound is not output, or when the predetermined prize-winning sound is output, the volume of the BGM1 is lowered. may

When the effect button 26 is operated during the first operation promoting effect, the premium effect is executed according to the operation (Fig. 49(C), time t1 in Fig. 44). For example, as a premium effect, a premium character 60 is displayed, and a line 61 uttered by the premium character 60 (for example, the words "congratulations" suggesting that a big win is confirmed) is displayed. Along with the display of the words 61 , the voice of the premium character 60 (for example, voice saying “Congratulations!”) is output from the speaker 24 . At this time, BGM1 is continuously reproduced. For example, the reproduction of BGM1 is continued, but the volume value of BGM1 is temporarily set to "0" (mute). Also, the volume of the voice of the premium character 60 is higher than the volume of the BGM 1 before the performance of the premium effect. Therefore, the player can easily hear the voice of the premium character 60 . Note that the volume value of BGM1 may be set to a value greater than "0" during execution of the premium effect. For example, the volume value of BGM1 may be set to "5" before the premiere effect and the first operation promotion effect are executed, and the volume value of BGM1 may be lowered to "3" during the execution of the premiere effect, or "5 " may be left as is.

A vibration motor may be provided inside the effect button 26, and the vibration motor may be used to vibrate the effect button 26 when the first operation promotion effect and/or the premium effect are executed. By vibrating the vibrating motor during the first operation promoting performance, the player can be made to expect that the highly anticipated performance will be performed before the performance button 26 is operated.

Then, when the premium effect ends, the premium character 60 disappears from the screen, and the volume of the BGM1 also returns to the level before the execution of the first operation promoting effect and the premium effect (FIG. 49(D)). Since the reproduction of BGM1 is continued during the performance of the premium effect shown in FIG. 49(C), the reproduction position of BGM1 advances as time elapses. Therefore, when the premium effect is finished and the volume of BGM1 is restored, the BGM1 progresses more than before the performance of the premium effect. For example, if the duration of the first operation-promoting effect and the premium effect is 5 seconds, and the playback position of BGM1 immediately before the start of the first operation-promoting effect is 5 seconds after the beginning of BGM1, the premium effect The playback position of BGM1 at the time of the end of BGM1 is the position 10 seconds from the beginning of BGM1.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the premium effect, decorative symbols of the same kind (for example, "8" symbols) are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas to establish a ready-to-win state (Fig. 49(E), time T1 in Fig. 44). ). BGM1 is stopped when a ready-to-win state is established, and a ready-to-reach state sound is output.

When the ready-to-win state is established, the N-reach effect is performed, BGM2 is output, and the decoration pattern changes in the middle area (FIG. 49(F)). BGM2 is continuously output during the N-reach effect.

During the N-reach production, there is a case where a development-suggestion production that suggests development to the SPSP-reach production is performed (FIG. 49(G)). For example, as shown in FIG. 49(G), as the middle decorative pattern 51b, a "7" pattern indicating a failure moves slowly from the top to the bottom of the screen and passes through the middle region, followed by the SPSP reach. The SPSP development suggestive pattern suggesting the development to the performance is displayed as it slowly moves from the top to the bottom of the screen.

Then, the SPSP development suggestive pattern is stopped as the middle decorative pattern 51b, and an SPSP development effect indicating that the SPSP ready-to-win effect develops is performed (FIG. 49(H), time T2 in FIG. 44). When the SPSP development suggesting pattern 51b stops, the BGM2 stops and an SPSP development sound suggesting the development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is output.

On the screen shown in FIG. 49(H), if the "8" symbol stops as the middle decorative symbol, it will be a big hit, and if the number symbols other than the "8" symbol stop, it will be a loss. In addition, when the middle decoration pattern moves slowly and then moves again at high speed, it develops into SP ready-to-win effect.

Following FIG. 49(H), the title of the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed (FIG. 50(I)). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of SPSP ready-to-win effects, and in FIG. 50(I), a title corresponding to the executed SPSP ready-to-win effects is displayed. This allows the player to recognize the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect to be executed. At this time, an image of a character or person appearing in the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be displayed. Also, a sound corresponding to the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect to be executed may be output from the speaker 24 .

When the screen of FIG. 49(H) is switched to the screen of FIG. 50(I), the left and right decorative patterns move to the left and right of the upper area of the screen while shrinking. 49A to 49H, each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner in which a predetermined character image is attached to a number. When the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, as shown in FIG. 50(I), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed relatively small on the left and right sides of the upper region of the screen, and an image of a predetermined character is displayed on the number. is displayed without the

Next, after a switching image (not shown) indicating switching to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started (FIG. 50(J), time T3 in FIG. 44). During the SPSP ready-to-win production, the SPSP ready-to-win animation production is displayed in the central area of the screen. BGM4 is started to be output from the speaker 24 when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. BGM4 has a predetermined playback time, and playback starts from the beginning. Different BGM4 is prepared for each type of SPSP ready-to-win effect, and BGM4 corresponding to the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect to be executed is output. During the SPSP ready-to-win effect, BGM4 is continuously output.

At the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the second operation promotion effect is started (Fig. 50(K), time t2 in Fig. 44). BGM4 is stopped at the time (or immediately before) when the second operation promotion effect is started. A predetermined period after the start of the second operation promotion effect is an operation preparation period, and during the operation preparation period, an image simulating the effect lever 28 is gradually completed. For example, a left lever partial image 91 imitating a left part of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the second operation promotion effect (Fig. 50(K)).

Subsequently, in the operation preparation period, in addition to the left lever partial image 91, a right lever partial image 92 imitating a part of the right side of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen (FIG. 50(L)).

Next, a central lever partial image 93 simulating the central portion of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen, completing the image simulating the effect lever 28 (FIG. 50(M), immediately before time t3 in FIG. 43). Specifically, immediately before the end of the operation preparation period (immediately before the start of the operation valid period), a complete image 90 simulating the entire effect lever 28 is displayed, and characters prompting the player to operate the effect lever 28 ( For example, the characters "pull the lever") are displayed. Also, just before the end of the operation preparation period, the speaker 24 outputs a second operation guidance sound (for example, "Pull the lever") that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28. FIG. The second operation guide sound may be longer than the first operation guide sound, or may be louder than the first operation guide sound.

Then, the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect lever 28 is valid starts, and the valid period image 95 indicating the operation valid period is displayed (Fig. 50 (N), time t3 in Fig. 43).

It should be noted that the display of a completed image 90 imitating the entirety of the effect lever 28, the display of the characters "pull the lever" prompting the operation of the effect lever 28, the display of the effective period image 95, and the output of the second operation guidance sound are , may be performed at the same timing or may be performed at different timings. For example, the display of these images and the output of the second operation guidance sound may be performed at the start of the valid operation period.

The operation valid period related to the second operation prompting effect is longer than the operation valid period related to the first operation prompting effect (FIG. 49(B)). Therefore, the effective period image 95 shown in FIG. 50(N) may be horizontally longer than the effective period image 81 shown in FIG. 49(B).

When the operation effective period of the second operation promotion effect starts, the sound limited state is entered in which neither BGM nor the second operation guidance sound is output. For example, during the effective operation period, a silent state in which no sound is output may be set. Also, during the valid period of operation, only a relatively soft sound may be output. For example, during the valid period of operation, the valid period image 95 may be used to display how the remaining time of the valid period of operation decreases, and a relatively small sound effect may be output as the remaining time decreases.

Then, in response to the fact that the performance lever 28 is operated during the operation valid period, or in response to the elapse of the operation valid period without the performance lever 28 being operated, the big hit notification performance is performed. (FIG. 50(O), time T4 in FIG. 44). Specifically, the "8" symbol of the same kind as the left and right decorative symbols stops as the middle decorative symbol 51b, and the movable accessory 7 advances to the central area of the screen. In addition, a jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output.

After the jackpot notification effect has been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the movable accessory 7 is retracted to the initial position, and the three same kinds of decorative patterns 51 temporarily stop in the central area of the screen, and then finally stop (Fig. 50(P)).

Next, a specific effect example of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing specific effects of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. As shown in FIG. 51, only parts different from those in FIG. 49 will be described, and descriptions of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the first operation prompting effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern 51 (FIG. 51(B), time t5 in FIG. 46). Specifically, as the first operation promotion effect, a button image 80 imitating the effect button 26 and a valid period image 81 indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 26 are displayed. At this time, a first operation guidance sound is output to prompt the player to press the effect button 26 . For example, an electronic sound may be output as the first operation guidance sound. Here, the same sound as the first operation guidance sound (FIG. 49(B)) in the first operation promotion effect immediately before the premium effect may be output, or a different sound may be output.

While the first operation promotion effect is being performed, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. Note that while the first operation guidance sound is being output, the volume of the BGM1 may be the same as before the execution of the first operation prompting effect, or may be reduced. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 during the first operation promoting effect, the same operation as in FIG. 49 is performed.

When the effect button 26 is operated during the first operation promoting effect, the advance notice effect is executed according to the operation (Fig. 51(C), time t1 in Fig. 46). For example, as an advance notice effect, a predetermined character 65 is displayed, and a line 66 uttered by the character 65 (for example, the words "chance" suggesting the possibility of a big win) is displayed. Along with the display of the words 66 , the voice of the predetermined character 65 (the voice of “chance”) is output from the speaker 24 . At this time, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. Specifically, the volume of the BGM1 during the notice effect is decreased from the volume of the BGM1 before the execution of the first operation promoting effect and the notice effect. Also, the volume of the sound of the predetermined character 65 is higher than the volume of the BGM 1 before and during the execution of the notice effect. Therefore, the player can easily hear the voice of the predetermined character 65 .

Note that there are a plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the degree of expectation for a big hit differs for each type of advance notice effects. When executing the notice effect, different sounds may be output according to the degree of expectation of the notice effect. In this case, the volume of BGM1 during the announcement effect may be lowered according to the degree of expectation of the announcement effect.

Further, the volume of BGM1 does not have to be lowered while the first operation promotion effect and the advance notice effect are being executed.

Also, depending on the degree of expectation of the notice effect to be executed, the effect button 26 may be vibrated using a vibration motor when the first operation promotion effect is executed and/or when the notice effect is executed. .

Then, when the advance notice effect ends, the predetermined character 65 disappears from the screen, and the volume of BGM1 also returns to the level before execution of the first operation prompting effect and the notice effect (FIG. 51(D)). That is, the volume of BGM1 returns to the volume before execution of the first operation promotion effect and the advance notice effect. For example, the volume value of BGM1 is set to "5" before execution of the first operation promotion effect, and the volume value of BGM1 is decreased to "3" during execution of the advance notice effect (while outputting the voice of the predetermined character 65). After the announcement effect is finished (after the sound of the predetermined character 65 is output), the volume value of BGM1 is set to "5". Since the reproduction of BGM1 is continued during execution of the advance notice effect of FIG. 51(C), the reproduction position of BGM1 advances according to the lapse of time. Therefore, when the announcement effect is finished and the sound volume of BGM1 is restored, the BGM1 progresses more than before the announcement effect is executed.

Since the effects after FIG. 51(D) are the same as those after FIG.

Next, a specific effect example of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing specific effects of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. As shown in FIG. 52, only parts different from those in FIG. 51 will be described, and descriptions of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 52A to 52D, the effects are performed in the order of the start effect, the first operation promotion effect, and the advance notice effect. Following FIG. 52(D), reach is established and BGM1 is stopped (time T1 in FIG. 47), and N reach performance is performed (FIG. 52(E)). BGM2 is output at the timing when the N-reach effect is started.

During the N-reach effect, there is a case where the third operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 26 is performed (Fig. 52(F), time t6 in Fig. 47). Specifically, as the third operation promotion effect, a button image 83 imitating the effect button 26 and a valid period image 84 indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 26 are displayed. The button image 83 displayed here is an image larger than the button image 80 in the first operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 52(B). Also, the button image 83 may be an image with a different color and pattern from the button image 80 . Note that the button image 83 may be the same image as the button image 80 or may be an image having the same size as the button image 80 . In addition, an image (for example, characters "press the button") prompting the user to press the effect button 26 is displayed on the screen. Note that the third operation promotion effect may be an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect lever 28 .

When the third operation promotion effect is executed, the BGM2 output during the N-reach effect is stopped. Specifically, the reproduction of BGM2 is also stopped internally. Further, when the third operation prompting effect is executed, a third operation guidance sound prompting the pressing of the effect button 26 is output. For example, as the third operation guidance sound, a sound prompting the user to press the effect button 26 (for example, a sound saying "press the button") may be output.

During the third operation prompting effect, the validity period image 84 changes according to the remaining time of the operation validity period (FIG. 52(G)). In addition, during the third operation prompting effect, a sound restriction state may occur in which neither BGM nor the third operation guidance sound is output. For example, a silent state may be set during the third operation prompting presentation. Also, during the third operation prompting effect, only a relatively soft sound may be output.

Then, when the effect button 26 is operated during the third operation promotion effect, or when the operation effective period elapses, the SPSP development effect is performed (FIG. 52(H), FIG. 47 time T2). For example, an SPSP development suggesting pattern suggesting development to SPSP ready-to-win production is displayed in the central area of the screen. In addition, an SPSP development sound is output to suggest development to an SPSP ready-to-win effect. In addition, in FIG. 52(H), an image different from the SPSP development suggesting symbol displayed in FIG. 49(H) or FIG. 51(H) may be displayed.

Since the effects after FIG. 52(H) are the same as those after FIG.

In FIG. 52, BGM2 is stopped when the third operation promoting effect is started. BGM1 may be continuously output during the period. In this case, BGM2 is stopped in accordance with the start of the SPSP development effect of FIG. 52(H).

Further, the blackout effect may be performed when the third operation promotion effect is started or when the SPSP development effect is started. An example of the blackout effect will be described below.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed according to an operation during the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 53, only parts different from those in FIG. 52 will be described, and descriptions of the same parts will be omitted.

In FIGS. 53(A) to (F), effects similar to those in FIGS. 52(A) to (F) are performed. In FIG. 53(F), the third operation promotion effect is performed, and the operation of the effect button 26 is prompted. The BGM 2 is stopped when the third operation prompting effect is started. If the effect button 26 is operated during the operation effective period of the third operation promotion effect, or if the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 26 being operated, a blackout effect is performed (Fig. 53(G)). For example, in the blackout effect, a black image is displayed on the entire screen, and the entire screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 is darkened. During the blackout production, the sound is restricted. For example, during the blackout effect, there may be no sound, or only a relatively soft sound may be output.

Note that even when the blackout effect is performed, the fourth pattern 55 is displayed on the screen. The fourth pattern 55 is displayed small in a predetermined area (for example, lower right) of the screen even while the blackout effect is being performed. That is, the fourth symbol 55 is always variably displayed while the special symbol is varying. The fourth pattern 55 is displayed in the same display mode (brightness and size) as before the blackout effect even during the blackout effect, and does not become dark like the background image or the like. Even after the blackout effect, the display mode of the fourth pattern 55 does not change. It should be noted that the fourth pattern 55 may be displayed by, for example, an LED display device provided around the screen instead of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 .

As with the fourth pattern 55, the decorative pattern 51 may also be displayed in the same display mode (brightness and size) during the blackout effect as before the blackout effect.

Further, BGM2 may be continuously output during the third operation promoting effect, and BGM2 may be stopped in response to the start of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 53(G).

Then, when the blackout effect ends, an SPSP development effect suggesting development to an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed (FIG. 53(H)). Since the effects after FIG. 53(H) are the same as those after FIG.

Here, a modification of the blackout effect before the SPSP development effect is performed will be described. FIG. 54 is a modification of FIG. 53, and shows an example of an effect in which a blackout effect is performed immediately before the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 54, only screen views after FIG. 53(E) are shown.

As shown in FIG. 54, reach is established and the N-reach effect is started (FIG. 54(E)). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the N-reach effect was started, a blackout effect is performed (FIG. 54(F)). At the timing when this blackout effect is performed, the BGM2 is stopped, and the sound restriction state (it may be a silent state or a state in which only a comparatively soft sound is output) is entered. After the blackout effect is performed, the third operation promotion effect is started (FIG. 54(G)). During the third operation prompting effect, the BGM2 remains stopped, and the third operation guidance sound is output. Then, the SPSP development effect is performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect (Fig. 54(H)). The effects after FIG. 54(H) are the same as those after FIG. 49(H) (FIGS. 49(H) to 50(P)).

In this way, the third operation promotion effect may be performed after the blackout effect is performed. In this case, the BGM2 may be stopped at the timing when the blackout effect is performed.

FIG. 55 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed during the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 55, only screen views after FIG. 53(E) are shown.

As shown in FIG. 55, reach is established and the N-reach effect is started (FIG. 55(E)). When a predetermined time has passed since the N-reach effect was started, the third operation promotion effect is performed and the blackout effect is performed (Fig. 55(F), time t6). For example, as shown in FIG. 55(F), while the button image 83 and valid period image 84 as the third operation promotion effect are displayed relatively brightly, other images are darkened. At the timing when the third operation promotion effect and the blackout effect are started, the BGM2 is stopped, and the sound restriction state (it may be a silent state or a state in which only a relatively small sound is output) is entered. 55(F), the background image, the decorative pattern 51, the pending display 52, and the changing display 53 may all be hidden, or the background image, the decorative pattern 51, and the pending display 52 may be hidden. , and the in-varying display 53 may be displayed darkly. Moreover, while the decorative pattern 51 is hidden or displayed darkly, the pending display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed (with the same brightness as before blackout).

Then, the SPSP development effect is performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect (FIG. 55(G)). The effects after FIG. 55(G) are the same as those after FIG. 49(H) (FIGS. 49(H) to 50(P)).

In this manner, the BGM2 may be stopped at the timing when the third operation promotion effect and the blackout effect are performed.

FIG. 56 is a modification of FIG. 53, showing an example of an effect in which the blackout effect is performed without the third operation promotion effect and develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect. In FIG. 56, only screen views after FIG. 53(E) are shown.

As shown in FIG. 56, reach is established and the N-reach effect is started (FIG. 56(E)). When a predetermined time has passed since the N-reach effect was started, a blackout effect is performed (FIG. 56(F)). At the timing when this blackout effect is started, the BGM2 is stopped, and the sound restriction state (it may be a silent state or a state in which only a comparatively soft sound is output) is entered.

After the blackout effect is performed, the SPSP development effect is performed (FIG. 56(G)). The effects after FIG. 56(G) are the same as those after FIG. 49(H) (FIGS. 49(H) to 50(P)).

As described above, various production patterns have been described, but these are only examples, and various production patterns other than those described above may be produced.

For example, in the variable effects in which the N reach effect is performed (variable effects based on the variable pattern OP1-1-2 and the variable patterns HP1-1-2), the above-described first operation promotion effect, advance notice effect, and premium effect are performed. good too. Then, the BGM during these presentations may be controlled as described above. In addition, in the variation production (variation pattern OP2-1 to 3, variation pattern HP2-1 to 3) in which the N reach production and the SP reach production are performed, the above-mentioned first operation promotion production, advance notice production, and premium production , a third operation promotion effect, an SP development effect, and a second operation promotion effect may be performed. Moreover, there may be an effect pattern in which the SP development effect is performed after the third operation promotion effect. Then, the BGM during these presentations may be controlled as described above.

In addition, in the variation performance (variation pattern OP3-1 to 3, variation performance based on the variation pattern HP3-1 to 3) in which the N reach performance, the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach performance are performed, the above-described first operation promotion performance, An advance notice effect, a premium effect, a third operation promotion effect, an SP development effect, and a second operation promotion effect may be performed. Then, the BGM during these presentations may be controlled as described above.

In addition, there is a variable effect in which a jackpot notification effect is performed without a ready-to-win effect, and in such a variable effect, the first operation promotion effect, the advance notice effect, the premier effect, and the second operation promotion effect before the jackpot notification effect are performed. may be done. Then, the BGM during these presentations may be controlled as described above.

For example, as an example in which a jackpot notification effect is performed without performing a ready-to-win effect, there is a sudden hit effect. In the hitting performance, three decorative patterns (decorative patterns including numbers and character images) start to fluctuate, and the three same kinds of decorative patterns are suddenly aligned without performing the ready-to-win performance, and a big hit is reported. That is, in the hitting effect, the same kind of decorative patterns are stopped on the left and right to notify the establishment of reach, and the ready-to-win effect that expects that the same kind of decorative pattern as the left and right decorative patterns is stopped as the middle decorative pattern is not performed. Suddenly, a jackpot is announced. For example, in a hit production, three same kinds of decorative symbols are stopped at the same time. When a collision effect is performed, the BGM that has been output before the execution of the collision effect may be stopped in accordance with (simultaneously with) the execution of the collision effect. Conversely, when a collision effect is performed, the BGM that has been output before the execution of the collision effect does not have to be stopped in accordance with (simultaneously with) the execution of the collision effect. In this case, the BGM may continue to be output even after the collision effect is started, or the BGM may be stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the collision effect was started. A sudden effect is executed when a variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, 20 seconds) is selected. When the hit performance is performed, the premium performance is likely to be executed, and for example, the execution probability of the premium performance is higher than when the variation patterns OP4-1 to OP4-3 and OP3-1 to OP3-3 with relatively long variation times are selected. is high. Also, when the hit effect is performed, the premium effect may be performed at a rate of 100%.

Incidentally, the hit performance may include a performance in which the three decorative symbols are aligned immediately after the ready-to-win is established. In this case, the decorative pattern may be in the same manner as during the N-reach production (in which the characters are not displayed in a reduced size), or in a different manner. There may be. Also, during the reach when the hitting effect is performed, the same normal background image as before the reach may be displayed. In addition, during the ready-to-win performance when the hitting effect is performed, the same BGM as before the ready-to-win effect may be output, or the same BGM as during the N-reach effect may be output. That is, the hit performance may be a performance of a big hit without developing into an SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect. In this case, it can be said that the hit performance is a performance that results in a big hit from the N reach performance, but it may be exactly the same as the performance that results in a big hit from the N reach performance, or a performance that results in a big hit from the N reach performance. , may be an effect with a short fluctuation time, or may be an effect with a longer fluctuation time than the effect of a big hit from the N-reach effect.

In addition, before the above-described first operation promotion effect, advance notice effect, premier effect, third operation promotion effect, SP development effect, SPSP development effect, second operation promotion effect, etc. are executed, suggestions suggesting these effects A performance may be performed.

Also, in the above description, each of the above effects is performed during one variation of the special symbol, and the control of the BGM during the effect has been described. Each of the above effects may be performed over a plurality of variations of special symbols. For example, based on the result of prior determination, a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of special symbol variations. BGM is output in the continuous performance. Also, during the continuous effect, the above-described first operation promotion effect, advance notice effect, premier effect, and third operation promotion effect may be executed, and BGM may be continuously output while these effects are being executed. Further, during the continuous performance of the first mode, a development performance that develops into the continuous performance of the second mode, which is more expected than the first mode, is performed, and the BGM being output is stopped when the development performance is executed. You may Further, before the development effect, an operation promoting effect for prompting the player's operation may be performed, and the BGM may be stopped when the operation promoting effect is executed.

In the above, an example in which a blackout effect is performed when developing into an SPSP ready-to-win effect has been described, but it is not limited to the blackout effect, and background images, decorative patterns, etc. are made invisible or invisible (confidential). ) Any production may be performed as long as it is production. For example, a white-out effect may be performed in which a white image is displayed on the entire screen. Also, for example, by displaying a predetermined image (for example, an image simulating a door or a shutter) that covers at least part of the background image on the foremost layer, at least part of the background image is hidden. may be performed. Also, a freeze effect may be performed in which the movement of the entire screen is stopped. During the freeze effect, the movement of the image displayed on the screen is stopped, the BGM is stopped (or paused), and the sound is restricted. When the freeze effect ends, the BGM may be reproduced and output from the beginning, or may be reproduced and output from the reproduction position immediately before the freeze effect. Also, during the freeze effect, the BGM may be internally reproduced, but the volume value may be set to "0", and the volume value may be restored when the freeze effect ends.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, BGM is output during the variation presentation corresponding to the variation of the special symbols. The gaming machine of the present embodiment has a first effect (forecast effect, premiere effect, first operation promotion effect, etc.) and a second effect (jackpot notification effect, second operation promotion effect, SPSP development effect, third operation promotion effect, etc.) can be executed. When the first effect (notice effect, premiere effect, etc.) is executed, the BGM is continuously reproduced and output during the first effect. On the other hand, the BGM is stopped when the second effect is executed.

Thus, the performance can be progressed in accordance with the BGM regardless of whether or not the first performance is executed during the variable performance. Also, since the BGM is stopped when the second effect is executed, the second effect can be emphasized and the player's attention can be directed to the second effect. For example, when a big win notification effect is performed as the second effect, the big win notification effect can be emphasized. Since the BGM is stopped immediately before the big win notification performance is performed, the player's expectation for the big win can be further enhanced. Also, when the SPSP development effect is performed as the second effect, the SPSP development effect can be emphasized.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the advance notice effect and the premium effect are executed, and the BGM is continuously output even during the first operation promotion effect. Therefore, the effect can be progressed in accordance with the BGM regardless of whether the first operation promoting effect is executed or not.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first effect (announcement effect, premiere effect, first operation promotion effect) may be performed when the first time has elapsed from the start of reproduction of the BGM, or may be performed when the second time has elapsed. Sometimes it is done when That is, the first effect is started at a random reproduction position in BGM. On the other hand, the second effect (jackpot notification effect, second operation promotion effect, etc.) is started at a fixed third time from the start of reproduction of the BGM. That is, the second effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in BGM.

As a result, for example, since the big win notification effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM, the player can predict the timing when the big win notification effect will be performed by the music, and the player's expectation is increased as the music progresses. can be enhanced. On the other hand, since the advance notice effect and the premiere effect are started at a random playback position in the BGM, it is not possible to predict when they will occur, so that the effect can be made unexpected and the interest can be improved. can.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the fixed third time varies depending on the variation pattern. For example, when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected, the third time is relatively long, and when a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is selected, the third time is relatively short. Thus, since the fixed position where the BGM stops differs depending on the variable time, the player can recognize the length of the variable time (that is, the degree of expectation) by how far the music has progressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the type of BGM during the SPSP ready-to-win effect differs depending on the variation pattern, and the type of BGM during the pre-reach effect changes depending on the stage (effect mode). Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of combination patterns of the BGM during the ready-to-win effect and the BGM during the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and to provide a variety of effects.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first effect (forecast effect, premiere effect, etc.) is performed using a predetermined number of effect means (liquid crystal display device 5, board lamp 25), and the second effect (jackpot notification effect, etc.) is performed. ) is produced by using more production means (liquid crystal display device 5, board lamp 25, movable accessory 7) than a predetermined number. For example, in the last big hit notification effect of the variable effect, a relatively flashy effect is performed using more effect means, so the interest is improved. On the other hand, in the case where, for example, a premium effect is performed during the variable effect, if the effect is too flashy, the player tends to lose interest in the subsequent effect. However, in this embodiment, in the premium effect in the middle of the variable effect, the effect is performed using a relatively small number of effect means, so the interest of the player can be maintained. Further, by continuing the BGM during the first performance in the midst of the variable performance, the player can be made to recognize that the performance is continuing, and the player's attention can be easily directed to the subsequent performance.

[Timer interrupt processing by effect control unit 130]
Next, details of effect control based on various commands from the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control section 130. As shown in FIG. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 of the effect control section 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 57 to 60 will be described below assuming that the processing shown in FIGS. It may be performed by any of the units 150 .

Effect control unit 130 (CPU 131 of) first executes command reception processing (step S1001). The command reception process of step S1001 is a process of controlling effects based on various commands from the game control unit 100. FIG. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 receives a command from the game control unit 100, determines the content of the effect according to the received command, and transmits the determined effect to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. A command to be executed is generated and set in the RAM 133 . Details of the command reception processing in step S1001 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Following step S1001, the effect control unit 130 performs command transmission processing for transmitting each command set in the RAM 133 to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step S1002). For example, a command for starting the variable effect set in the process of step S1001 and a command for ending the variable effect are transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the image sound control unit 140 performs image display, sound output, etc., and the lamp control unit 150 operates the movable accessory 7, turns on the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, and controls the production button 26 and the production lever 28. etc. are controlled.

Following the processing of step S1002, the effect control unit 130 executes transfer processing (step S1003). Specifically, when receiving a control command from the image sound control unit 140 , the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the lamp control unit 150 . For example, the control commands from the image sound control unit 140 include a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, a control command for operating the effect lever 28, a board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light. Also, when receiving a control command from the lamp control unit 150 , the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the image sound control unit 140 . Control commands from the lamp control unit 150 include a control command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated, a control command indicating that the effect lever 28 has been operated, and the like. By transmitting and receiving control commands via the effect control unit 130 between the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the movable role is synchronized with the image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. An object 7 moves, and an image is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect lever 28.例文帳に追加

[Command reception processing by effect control unit 130]
Hereinafter, command reception processing executed in the effect control section 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 . FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG.

First, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not a pending command transmitted from the game control unit 100 is received (step S1301). When it determines with having received the pending|holding command (step S1301: YES), the production|presentation control part 130 performs a pending|holding command process (step S1302). Details of the pending command process will be described later.

When the process of step S1302 is executed, or when it is determined that the pending command is not received (step S1301: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the variation start command is received (step S1303 ).

When the fluctuation start command is received (step S1303: YES), the effect control section 130 executes the fluctuation start command process (step S1304). Specifically, in step S1304, the production control unit 130 determines the contents of the fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the received fluctuation start command, and the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 Generate a command to execute a variable effect. The command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the command transmission process of step S1002, and the variable effect is executed. Details of the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (step S1303: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the variation stop command is received (step S1305).

When the fluctuation stop command is received (step S1305: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the fluctuation stop command process (step S1306). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 transmits a variable effect end command for ending the variable effect to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 . As a result, for example, the decorative pattern 51 that is being variably displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) on the liquid crystal display device 5 is actually stopped, and the variable effect is completed.

When the process of step S1306 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S1305: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the opening command is received (step S1307 ).

When an opening command is received (step S1307: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes opening processing (step S1308). Specifically, the performance control unit 130 determines the opening performance based on the opening command transmitted when a big win is won, and causes the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening performance.

When the process of step S1308 is executed, or when it is determined that the opening command is not received (step S1307: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the ending command is received (step S1309). .

When an ending command is received (step S1309: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes ending processing (step S1310). In the ending process, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed.

When the process of step S1310 is executed, or when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (step S1309: NO), the effect control section 130 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Reservation command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of pending command processing in step 1302 of FIG. The effect control unit 130 first updates the number of pending special symbol determination stored in the RAM 133 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S1320). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of reserves of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. When it does, it updates to the value which added "1" to the number of reservations of the 2nd special design decision.

Next, the effect control unit 130 acquires the prior determination information included in the received pending command (step S1321).

Next, the effect control unit 130 determines by lottery whether or not to perform the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination information (step S1322). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to change the pending display 52 to a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than usual, and the scenario of the change, as the preliminary determination effect. For example, it is determined whether or not to change the pending display 52 relating to the winning to the starting port this time to a mode with a high degree of expectation at the time of winning, or whether or not to change in the next and subsequent special symbol variations. In addition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform a continuous effect over variations of a plurality of special symbols as a preliminary determination effect.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 determines the winning sound when displaying the pending display 52 relating to the winning to the start opening this time (step S1323). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines different winning sounds according to the color of the pending display 52 determined in step S1322.

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets a pending increase command based on the results of the processes of steps S1322 and S1323 (step S1324). By transmitting this hold increase command to the image sound control unit 140, the hold display 52 related to the winning of the start opening this time on the liquid crystal display device 5 is displayed in the display mode determined in step S1322. The winning sound determined in step S1323 is output.

[Variation start command processing by production control unit 130]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flow chart of the change start command processing in step 1304 of FIG.

Effect control unit 130 analyzes the received variation start command (step S1340). In this variation start command, the information of the pattern indicating the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (whether it is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern, etc.), whether the information of this pattern is related to the first special pattern judgment, or the second special pattern Winning start opening information indicating whether or not it relates to the determination, information on the variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are included. The effect control unit 130 can specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command. That is, it is possible to specify whether or not the game is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot and the variation pattern (variation time). Also, the current game state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the game state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the effect control unit 130 determines an effect pattern indicating the content of the variable effect associated with the variable display of the special symbols based on the analysis result (step S1341). Here, a rough flow of the variable production is determined. Specifically, based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the effect control unit 130 controls the variation mode of the decorative symbol, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the SP development effect and its type, the SPSP Whether or not there is a development effect and its type, whether or not there is a pseudo-fluctuation effect, the types of decorative patterns forming the ready-to-win pattern, the types of decorative patterns to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. In addition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform the second operation promotion effect to be performed immediately before the win-loss notification effect (jackpot notification effect or reach-losing notification effect) based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. do. Also, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform the third operation promotion effect performed immediately before the development effect (SP development effect or SPSP development effect) based on the variation pattern of the special symbols.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130, by performing a lottery using the effect random number, whether or not to perform various advance notice effect, etc. when the variable effect is performed by the effect pattern determined in the process of step S1341, and , determine the contents of the announcement effect and the like (step S1342). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the above-described advance notice effect (effect suggesting the possibility of a big win), the type of notice effect, and the timing of executing the notice effect, based on the effect pattern. Along with the determination, it determines whether or not to execute the first operation prompting effect, the timing of executing the first operation prompting effect, and the like. In addition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the premium effect, the type of the premium effect, the timing of executing the premium effect, etc., based on the effect pattern, and determines whether or not to execute the first operation promotion effect. Alternatively, the timing and the like for executing the first operation prompting effect are determined. It should be noted that the effect control unit 130 has a higher probability of determining that the premium effect is to be executed as the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter.

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets a variable effect start command for instructing execution of the variable effect according to the effect patterns determined in the processing of steps S1341 and S1342 to the RAM 133 (step S1343). This variable effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 . As a result, the determined variable effects (effects to be performed during the fluctuation of the special symbols including ready-to-win effects, advance notice effects, etc.) are executed by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 .

Following the processing of step S1343, the effect control unit 130 subtracts "1" from the number of reservations stored in the RAM 133 (step S1344).

In addition to the processing described above, the effect control unit 130 determines the effect mode (stage) based on the received variation start command. The effect control unit 130 determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, determines whether or not to change the effect mode (stage) by performing a lottery using the effect random number. to decide. For example, the production control unit 130, as a predetermined condition, determines whether or not the number of fluctuations in the special symbol after shifting to the current stage is a predetermined number or more, or a specific production (for example, SPSP It is determined whether or not reach performance) has been executed. When it is decided to change the stage, a variable effect is executed using a background image, BGM, decorative patterns, etc., according to the decided stage.

[Configuration of Image Sound Control Unit 140]
Next, an example of the configuration of the image sound control section 140 will be described. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the image sound control section 140. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61, the image sound control section 140 includes a CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, a VRAM 145, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 146, a signal output section 147, an input It has an output unit 148 and an audio ROM 149 .

The CPU 141 transmits image data stored in a CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 144 based on programs stored in the control ROM 144, various tables such as a display list creation table, commands received from the effect control unit 130, and the like. An instruction is given to display an image based on the image on the liquid crystal display device 5 . This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

The display list consists of a group of commands for instructing drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, including the type of image to draw, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, rotation angle, transmittance, etc. contains various parameters of Also, the display list creation table is a table used to create this display list.

The CPU 141 also instructs the audio DSP 146 to output sound from the speaker 24 based on the audio data stored in the audio ROM 149 . The sound ROM 149 stores sound data corresponding to each of the BGMs 1 to 5 described above, sound data corresponding to the ready-to-win sound, sound data corresponding to the voice of the character 65, sound data corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60, Acoustic data corresponding to the 1st operation guide sound, Acoustic data corresponding to the 2nd operation guide sound, Acoustic data corresponding to the 3rd operation guide sound, Acoustic data corresponding to the SP development sound, Acoustic data corresponding to the SPSP development sound, Acoustic data corresponding to the jackpot notification sound, acoustic data corresponding to other various sound effects, and the like are stored. Each acoustic data is stored as one file. The sound DSP 146 performs sound reproduction processing (decoding) based on the sound data stored in the sound ROM 149 and outputs the sound to the outside through the speaker 24 . In addition, the CPU 141 controls the volume when sound is output.

The audio DSP 146 is connected to an audio ROM 149 that stores various audio data related to music such as BGM, voices such as characters, sound effects, etc., an SDRAM that is used as a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 146, and an amplifier. It is The audio DSP 146 reads audio data corresponding to instructions from the CPU 141 from the audio ROM 149 to the SDRAM, executes data processing to generate an audio signal, and outputs the generated audio signal to the speaker 24 (via an amplifier). . The amplifier adjusts the volume according to the output volume (described later) specified by the CPU 141 and outputs the acoustic signal to the speaker 24 .

The control ROM 142 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables, and the like.

The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 141 executes the above programs or as a work area for data processing.

The CGROM stores performance data necessary for executing a variable performance associated with variable display of special symbols, a performance associated with a big win game, and the like. This CGROM is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and includes sprite data (single image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32×32 pixels), and a plurality of image data. Compressed movie data or the like consisting of a collection of . Alternatively, only part of the image data stored in the CGROM may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. The CGROM for storing the image data and the sound ROM 149 for storing the sound data may be the same storage means.

The VRAM 145 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and is composed of a display list storage area, a development storage area, a frame buffer, and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, drawing processing is performed by double buffering.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the CPU 141 . The development storage area stores the image data decompressed after being read from the CGROM. The frame buffer is also used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 .

The VDP 144 decompresses the image data stored in the CGROM in a compressed state, and stores the decompressed image data in the expansion storage area. Also, the VDP 144 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the development storage area based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. The VDP 144 also generates RGB signals as video signals indicating the colors of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signals to the liquid crystal display device 5 .

The signal output unit 147 outputs a predetermined signal to the CPU 141 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1-second intervals) for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). For example, the signal output section 147 may output a predetermined signal at regular time intervals. The CPU 141 executes different processes depending on whether the predetermined signal is input from the signal output section 147 or when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output section 147 . The relationship between the predetermined signal output by the signal output unit 147 and the effects controlled by the CPU 141 will be described later.

The input/output unit 148 receives commands from the effect control unit 130 and transmits commands to the effect control unit 130 . The input/output unit 148 is connected to the CPU 141 .

In this embodiment, the VDP 144 is responsible for drawing control and the acoustic DSP 146 is responsible for sound control related to sound reproduction. configuration may be adopted. In this case, there is no need to provide an acoustic DSP separately. Also, the signal output unit 147 may be incorporated in another part instead of being an independent circuit. For example, the VDP 144 or the CPU 141 may also serve as the signal output section 147 .

[Timer Interrupt Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 140]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control section 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control section 140. FIG. The image sound control unit 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 62 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. do.

First, the image sound control unit 140 (the CPU 141 thereof) determines whether or not a variable effect start command is received from the effect control unit 130 (step S1401). When receiving the variable effect start command, the image sound control unit 140 starts the variable effect according to the content of the variable effect included in the variable effect start command (step S1402). As a result, the liquid crystal display device 5 starts a variable effect. In addition, the speaker 24 outputs a sound related to the variable effect. The variation performance start command includes information about what kind of image is displayed at what timing from the start of variation of the special symbols, and what kind of sound is output.

When the process of step S1402 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S1401, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not the variable effect is being executed (step S1403). When the variable effect is being executed (step S1403: YES), the image sound control section 140 executes processing during the variable effect (step S1404). The details of the processing during the variation effect will be described later.

When the process of step S1404 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S1403, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not a command to end the variation effect is received (step S1405). When the variable effect end command is received (step S1405: YES), the image sound control unit 140 ends the variable effect (step S1406). Specifically, the image sound control section 140 permanently stops the decorative pattern 51 displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 . It should be noted that the image sound control unit 140 does not stop the BGM1 being output even when receiving the variable effect end command from the effect control unit 130 .

In addition to the processing shown in FIG. 62, the image sound control unit 140 performs processing related to the pending command, processing related to the opening effect, processing related to the jackpot game effect during the jackpot game, processing related to the ending effect, and the like. As a result, the pending display 52 is displayed, the opening effect is executed, the jackpot game effect is executed, and the ending effect is executed.

[Process during fluctuation effect by image sound control unit 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the processing during the variation effect in step S1404 will be described. FIG. 63 is a detailed flow chart of the processing during the variation effect in step 1404 of FIG. In the following, the processing when the variable effect shown in FIG. 44 (the variable effect developing from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect) is determined based on the change pattern OP4-1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63, the image sound control unit 140 performs drawing processing (step S1420). Specifically, VDP 144 generates an image and stores it in a frame buffer. Then, the image stored in the frame buffer is output to the liquid crystal display device 5 and displayed. A moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 by performing drawing processing at regular time intervals. The image sound control unit 140 generates an image corresponding to the variable effect (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol according to the number of frames or the elapsed time from the start of the variable effect. output. That is, when the content of the variable effect is determined by the effect control unit 130 (that is, at the start of the change), what kind of image is generated at what frame (after how many seconds) from the start of the variable effect, and the liquid crystal display device 5 It is determined whether to output to Also, at the start of the fluctuation, what kind of image is generated and output depends on the operation of the operation means (the production button 26 or the production lever 28) after what frame from the start of the fluctuation production. , is determined at the start of the fluctuation. Then, the image sound control unit 140 performs a predetermined image rendering process at a predetermined timing.

For example, the image sound control unit 140 displays an image related to the first operation prompting effect at time t5 (for example, 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Further, the image sound control section 140 displays the image of the premier character 60 at time t1. Specifically, when the effect button 26 is operated during the operation valid period of the first operation promotion effect (for example, between 5 seconds and 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the operation information is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. is input to the image sound control unit 140 (via the effect control unit 130). The image/sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premium character 60 at t1 when the operation information is input. Alternatively, the image/sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premier character 60 at t1, which is the timing when the operation effective period of the first operation promotion effect has passed (for example, 8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). In addition, the image sound control unit 140 displays an image (eg, see FIG. 49(E)) indicating reach formation at time T1 (eg, 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Further, the image sound control section 140 displays an image showing the SPSP development effect (for example, see FIG. 49(H)) at time T2 (for example, 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Further, the image sound control unit 140 displays an image (for example, see FIG. 50(K)) related to the second operation prompting effect at time t2 (for example, 70 seconds after the start of fluctuation).

Here, when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 generates and outputs an image determined at the start of fluctuation (determined by the effect control unit 130). On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 does not generate the image (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation. In this case, the image sound control section 140 may generate and output an image different from the image determined at the start of the fluctuation (determined by the effect control section 130). For example, when it is decided at time t1 to output an image of the premium character 60 suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed, when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 An image of the premier character 60 is output at time t1. On the other hand, even if it is decided at time t1 to output the image of the premium character 60 suggesting that the big win is confirmed, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, image sound control is performed. The unit 140 does not output the image of the premium character 60 at time t1. In this case, the image sound control section 140 may output an image that does not suggest the possibility of a big win (an image in which the possibility of a big win cannot be recognized).

In this manner, by performing different display control depending on whether the predetermined signal is input or when the predetermined signal is not input, it is possible to provide a variety of effects.

After step S1420, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not it is time to control the sound (step S1421). Here, it is determined whether or not it is time to start outputting sound, and whether or not it is time to control the volume of the sound being output.

If YES is determined in step S1421, the image sound control unit 140 performs sound control processing (step S1422). Details of the sound control processing in step S1422 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the sound control processing in step S1422 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to start outputting a new sound (step S1441). As described above, at the start of the fluctuation, what kind of sound is to be output at what frame (after how many seconds) from the start of the fluctuation production? It is determined what kind of sound is to be output according to the operation of the lever 28). If YES is determined in step S1441, the image sound control unit 140 starts reproducing processing of predetermined sound data (step S1442).

For example, if it is determined at time t1 to output the image of the premier character 60 and to start reproducing the sound data A1 corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60 at time t1, YES in step S1441 at time t1. is determined. Then, in step S1422, the image sound control section 140 starts playing (decoding) the sound data A1 corresponding to the sound of the premier character 60. FIG. Specifically, the CPU 141 of the image sound control unit 140 instructs the sound DSP 146 to reproduce the sound data A1. The sound DSP 146 reads the sound data A1 and starts reproducing the voice of the premier character 60 according to the instruction. After that, the audio DSP 146 continues to reproduce the audio data A1 until the reproduction time of the audio data A1 ends without depending on the instruction of the CPU 141 . For example, if the reproduction time of the audio data A1 is 3 seconds, the audio DSP 146 continues reproducing the audio data A1 until 3 seconds have elapsed since the reproduction of the audio data A1 was started.

Further, for example, when the production control unit 130 determines to start playing back the BGM1 at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined as YES in step S1441 at the start of the fluctuation. In this case, the CPU 141 instructs the audio DSP 146 to reproduce the audio data B1 corresponding to the BGM1 in step S1442. After that, the audio DSP 146 continues to reproduce the audio data B1 until the reproduction of the audio data B1 is completed regardless of the instruction from the CPU 141. FIG. Further, the CPU 141 may instruct the audio DSP 146 to repeat the BGM1 (that is, to repeat the reproduction of the audio data B1) when instructing the reproduction of the audio data B1 corresponding to the BGM1. In this case, the audio DSP 146 restarts the reproduction of the audio data B1 from the beginning when the reproduction of the audio data B1 corresponding to the BGM1 is completed. Further, when the reproduction of the sound data B1 is finished, the CPU 141 may instruct to start reproducing the sound data B1 again from the beginning.

Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441 at the timing (T1) when reach is established, for example. Then, in step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 146 to reproduce the sound data A2 corresponding to the ready-to-win sound. As a result, the audio DSP 146 starts reproducing the audio data A2, and the reach establishment sound is output from the speaker 24. FIG.

In addition, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441 at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since reach is established. Then, in step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the audio DSP 146 to reproduce the audio data B2 corresponding to the BGM2.

Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441 at the timing (T3) at which the SPSP development effect ends and the SPSP ready-to-win effect starts. Then, in step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the audio DSP 146 to reproduce the audio data B4 corresponding to BGM4.

In this manner, the image sound control unit 140 starts reproducing the sound data corresponding to the sound when the timing for outputting the sound comes. When sound is output in synchronization with image display, the image display start timing is synchronized with the sound output start timing, and after the sound output is started, the sound DSP 146 finishes reproducing the sound data. Playback of the audio data continues until That is, in the present embodiment, when the sound is output in synchronization with the display of the image, although the start timing is synchronized, the sound and the image are not synchronized for each frame. As another control method, the sound and image may be synchronized for each frame.

If the process of step S1442 has been executed, or if NO is determined in step S1441, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to adjust the sound volume (step S1443). If YES is determined in step S1443, the image sound control unit 140 adjusts the volume (step S1444).

For example, when another sound (for example, the sound of the premier character 60) is output while BGM1 is being output, and control is performed to lower the volume of BGM1, the image sound control unit 140 outputs the sound. YES is determined in step S1443 at the timing. In this case, the image sound control section 140 starts reproducing the sound data A corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60 in step S1442, and controls the volume of BGM1 in step S1444.

Here, the volume will be explained. The sound volume of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is determined as follows.
Sound data itself As described above, the sound data corresponding to each sound is stored in (the sound ROM 149 of) the image sound control unit 140 . The amplitude of the waveform determines the volume of the sound that the data (the sound) itself has.
- Basic volume value The basic volume value is a volume value recommended when reproducing the above sound data, and is specified for each sound data. The basic sound volume value is set by the developer of the gaming machine, and is not changed by, for example, a player after the gaming machine is shipped. Basically, for each sound data, the same basic volume value is defined for both the sound related to the effect and the sound related to the error sound. For example, when the volume value is set in the range of "0" to "10", "5" is set as the basic volume value.
- Channel volume value The channel volume value is a volume value specified for each channel (described later). The channel volume value is designated when (the CPU 141 of) the image sound control unit 140 raises or lowers the volume.
- Master Volume Value The master volume value is the volume value that is adjusted by the player. For example, when the player presses the left key of the effect key 27, the master volume value is set to a small value, and when the right key of the effect key 27 is pressed, the master volume value is set to a large value. set.

Then, the base volume value is converted to a channel volume value, and the output volume is determined according to the following equation.
Output volume = (channel volume value) x master volume value

Here, channels used for sound output control will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a plurality of virtual channels are provided for sound output control. For example, six channels (1ch to 6ch) are provided as error sound channels used for outputting error sounds. Also, 24 channels (7ch to 30ch) are provided as effect sound channels used for outputting effect sounds (sounds related to effects such as BGM, character voices, sound effects, etc.). One sound (one acoustic data) is output using one channel, and two or more sounds are not output using the same channel at the same time. Also, the effect sound is never output using the error sound channel. When outputting a certain error sound, the image sound control unit 140 uses an empty channel among the error sound channels 1ch to 6ch. Further, when outputting a certain effect sound, the image sound control unit 140 uses an empty channel among the effect sound channels 7ch to 30ch.

When a sound effect is output using a certain channel, a channel volume value is specified for that channel. Basically, the same (or corresponding) channel volume value is set as the basic volume value set in the acoustic data. When image sound control section 140 changes the volume of sound in step S1444, it changes the channel volume value associated with that sound. For example, when BGM1 is being output, the image sound control unit 140 changes the channel volume value related to BGM1 from "5" to "3", for example, when lowering the volume of BGM1 in accordance with the execution of the announcement effect. When changing or muting BGM1, the channel volume value related to BGM1 is changed from "5" to "0", for example. In addition, when decreasing (or increasing) the volume of BGM1 over time, the image sound control unit 140 decreases (or increases) the channel volume value related to BGM1 over time.

Note that when all of the effect sound channels 7ch to 30ch are in use (when 24 types of effect sounds are being output at the same time), when the image sound control unit 140 outputs a new different effect sound, Any effect sound is canceled, and the channel used to output the canceled effect sound is used to output the newly generated effect sound. Specifically, a priority is assigned to each effect sound. The priority is given to the sound in advance by the developer of the gaming machine 1 . The priority of the effect sound is set in the range of 1 to 5, for example. For example, the priority of BGM1 may be set to "1", which is the lowest, and the priority of the effect sound (the voice of the predetermined character 65 and the premiere character 60) relating to the premiere effect and the preview effect may be set to "3". . In this case, for example, when 24 types of effect sounds including BGM1 are being output at the same time during the pre-reach effect, when the sound of a predetermined character 65 is output in response to the start of the advance notice effect, the predetermined sound is output rather than the BGM1. is preferentially output. Note that the priority of BGM may be set to a relatively high value.

Further, in the case of outputting a new sound effect when all the sound effect channels are in use, if the priority of the new sound effect is lower than the priority of all sound effects that are currently being output, the new sound effect A dramatic sound does not have to be output.

If the process of step S1444 has been executed, or if NO is determined in step S1443, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to stop the BGM being output (step S1445). If YES is determined in step S1445, the image sound control unit 140 stops the BGM being output (step S1446).

For example, the image sound control section 140 stops the reproduction of BGM1 at the timing when reach is established ((E) in FIG. 49). Also, the image sound control section 140 stops the reproduction of the BGM2 at the timing of starting the SPSP development effect ((H) in FIG. 49). In addition, the image sound control section 140 stops the reproduction of the BGM4 at the timing ((K) in FIG. 50) immediately before the second operation prompting effect is started.

Here, in the process of step S1442, when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 outputs the sound determined at the start of fluctuation (determined by the effect control unit 130). Output. On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 does not output the sound (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation. In this case, the image sound control section 140 may output a sound different from the sound determined at the start of the fluctuation (determined by the effect control section 130). For example, when it is decided to output the voice of the premier character 60 at time t1, when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 outputs the sound of the premier character 60 at time t1. outputs the sound of On the other hand, even if it has been decided to output the voice of the premier character 60 at time t1, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image sound control unit 140 , the voice of the premium character 60 is not output. In this case, the image sound control section 140 may output a sound that does not suggest the possibility of a big win. The image sound control unit 140 may output a sound (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation even when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. For example, when it is decided to output the voice of the premier character 60 at time t1, even when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 outputs the sound of the premier character 60 at time t1. may be output.

Further, for example, when it is determined at the start of variation that the sound of a predetermined character 65 is to be output at time t1 during the output of BGM1, the image sound control unit 140 outputs a predetermined sound from the signal output unit 147 at time t1. is input, the BGM1 is continuously output, and when the predetermined signal is not input, the BGM1 is not continuously output. That is, even if it is determined in advance to continuously output BGM1 at time t1, BGM1 is not continuously output when a predetermined signal is not input at time t1. The image sound control section 140 may continue to output BGM1 even when the predetermined signal from the signal output section 147 is not input. Further, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image sound control unit 140 continues to output BGM1, while other audio related to the announcement effect (for example, character ) may not be output.

In addition, in the process of step S1444, the image sound control unit 140 adjusts the volume when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147, and adjusts the volume when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. No volume adjustment.

Further, if it is determined at the start of fluctuation that the BGM being output at a predetermined timing is to be stopped, the image sound control unit 140 is configured to control the output even when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147. BGM is stopped at the predetermined timing even when it is not.

In this way, by performing different sound control depending on whether the predetermined signal is input or when the predetermined signal is not input, it is possible to provide a variety of presentations. This completes the description of the processing in FIG.

It should be noted that regardless of whether or not a predetermined signal is input from the signal output section 147, a predetermined sound may be output at the start of fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 63, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether it is the control timing of the production means (movable accessory 7, board lamp 25, frame lamp 37, production button 26, production lever 28, etc.) controlled by the lamp control unit 150. (step S1423). As described above, the content of the variable performance determined at the start of the variation includes at what timing the movable accessory 7 is to be operated, whether to control the performance button 26 (operation, light emission, vibration, etc.), and to control the performance lever 28. (movement, light emission, vibration, etc.), the board lamp 25 to emit light, or the frame lamp 37 to emit light is determined. For example, the image sound control section 140 determines whether or not it is time to control the movable accessory 7 controlled by the lamp control section 150 based on the number of frames or the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation.

When it is determined as YES in step S1423, the image sound control section 140 transmits a control command to the effect control section 130 (step S1424). The control commands include a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, a control command for operating the effect lever 28, a control command for causing the board lamp 25 to emit light, There are control commands and the like for causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light. When the effect control unit 130 receives these control commands from the image sound control unit 140 , the effect control unit 130 transfers these control commands to the lamp control unit 150 . As a result, the movable accessory 7 operates, the production button 26 operates, the production lever 28 operates, the board lamp 25 emits light, and the frame lamp 37 emits light.

For example, when it is time to operate the movable accessory 7, the image sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 (via the effect control unit 130). Further, the image sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for causing the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light to the lamp control unit 150 when it is time to light up the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 .

Here, in the process of step S1424, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image sound control unit 140 outputs the control command (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation. is sent to lamp control unit 150 . For example, when a predetermined signal is input at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7 , a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150 . On the other hand, when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image sound control unit 140 may or may not output the control command determined at the start of fluctuation. For example, at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7, when the predetermined signal is not input, the control command for operating the movable accessory 7 may be transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, or not transmitted. good too. When the image sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 even when a predetermined signal is not input, the movable accessory 7 operates. That is, in this case, regardless of whether or not a predetermined signal is input, the movable accessory 7 operates in a manner determined at the start of fluctuation. If the image sound control unit 140 does not send a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 when the predetermined signal is not input, the movable accessory 7 is determined at the start of the fluctuation. does not work in this manner. In this case, the movable accessory 7 may operate in another mode.

The same applies to the light emission of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 . That is, when a predetermined signal is input, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in a manner defined (determined by the effect control section 130) at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, when a predetermined signal is not input to the image sound control unit 140, the control command for lighting the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 may be transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, or may not be transmitted. . When a predetermined signal is not input, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 do not emit light unless a control command for lighting the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 is sent to the lamp control unit 150 . In this case, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 may emit light in another mode. Even when a predetermined signal is not input, if a control command for causing the board lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 to emit light is sent to the lamp control unit 150, the board lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 will operate according to the control command. luminous.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the BGM is output during the variable effect, the first effect (announcement effect or premium effect) to continue the BGM being output, and the second effect to stop the BGM being output. 2 productions (development production and jackpot notification production) are performed. Assuming that the performance progresses according to the flow of the BGM, the BGM is continuously output when the first performance is performed, so the first performance can be executed without breaking the flow of the BGM. Further, for example, when the big win notification effect indicating the determination of the big win is executed, the BGM is stopped, so that the player's attention can be directed to the big win notification effect.

[Modification]
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be in the following forms.

For example, in the above embodiment, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, and BGM5 are stored in the sound ROM 149 as separate sound data (sound files). Then, for example, when switching from BGM2 to BGM3, reproduction of BGM2 is stopped (reproduction of sound data corresponding to BGM2 is terminated), and reproduction of sound data corresponding to BGM3 is started. Further, for example, when performing the jackpot notification effect from the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the reproduction of BGM4 is stopped, the jackpot notification effect is performed, and the reproduction of BGM5 is started. In another embodiment, BGM 1 to 5 are stored in the audio ROM 149 as one piece of audio data (acoustic file), and by pausing the reproduction of the audio data or changing the reproduction position, it is possible to change the performance during each performance. BGM may be output. For example, when the jackpot notification effect is performed from the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the BGM4 may be temporarily stopped by temporarily stopping the reproduction of the sound data constituting the BGM4 and BGM5. Then, the BGM5 portion may be output by outputting a jackpot notification sound according to the execution of the jackpot notification effect, and then resuming the reproduction of the sound data from the paused position.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the above-described image-based effect and sound control are performed in the variable effect during the fluctuation of the special symbol, but not limited to the variable effect, the same control as described above is performed in the effect during the jackpot game. may Further, the same control may be performed regardless of whether the game state of the gaming machine 1 is the normal game state, the probability variable game state advantageous to the player, or the time-saving game state.

Also, the various values (eg, variation time, probability, etc.) exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and values different from those described above may be used.

Further, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. In addition, the order of processing, set values, thresholds used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

[Modified example of decorative pattern]
In addition, the function of suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win may be given to the element related to the color of the decorative pattern (specifically, the number). For example, the image representing the number of the decorative pattern may be configured in different colors according to the number. For example, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 10R probability variation, even numbered symbols and odd numbered symbols are selected as reach symbols (decorative symbols used for reach effect. Types of two decorative symbols that stop left and right during reach effect) On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 4R normal, the odd symbols may not be selected. In this case, it is also possible to provide the function of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the variable probability gaming state to the element relating to the color of the decorative pattern. That is, for example, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed, when the odd-numbered patterns (for example, 7 patterns) of a predetermined color are displayed as ready-to-win patterns, the even-numbered patterns (for example, to 2 patterns) other than the predetermined colors are displayed as ready-to-win patterns. It can be said that the expectation of moving to the probability variation gaming state is higher than when it is done. In addition, when the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the numbers of ready-to-win symbols, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the colors of the decorative symbols.

Also, the numbers forming the odd patterns and the numbers forming the even patterns may be of different colors, the colors of the numbers forming the odd patterns may be plural, and the colors of the numbers forming the even patterns may be plural. good. For example, if the color of the number "7" constituting the 7 patterns among the odd patterns is red, and the color of the numbers constituting the odd patterns other than the 7 patterns is green, then the numbers composing the even patterns The color may be blue (ie, colors other than red and green).

A plurality of colors may be associated with one number forming each decorative pattern. For example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are prepared in advance as the colors of the numbers that make up each decorative pattern. may be set in advance so that the For example, the expectation is higher when the reach symbol is a white odd number pattern than when the reach symbol is a white even number pattern, and the expectation is higher when the reach symbol is a red odd number pattern. (It may be a big hit confirmation). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the colors of the decorative patterns.

Also, a plurality of types of characters may be prepared in advance as additional displays for each number forming each decorative pattern. For example, a character as additional display may be different for each number constituting the decorative pattern, and a plurality of characters may be associated as additional display for one number. Specifically, the characters A to C, which are additionally displayed with seven symbols, may not be additionally displayed with decorative symbols representing other numbers. For example, it may be set in advance so that the degree of expectation for a big hit and the degree of expectation for shifting to the variable probability gaming state are increased in order of characters A to C. For example, the degree of expectation is higher when the ready-to-win state is established by the decorative pattern of the first mode to which the character B is added than when the ready-to-reach state is established by the decorative pattern of the first mode where the character A is added, and further, The degree of expectation is higher in the case where the ready-to-win state is established with the decoration pattern of the first mode to which the character C is added (a big win may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in elements related to the additional display of decorative symbols. A plurality of types of characters corresponding to any of the patterns 1 to 9 may be prepared in advance as additional displays. For example, characters A to C may be prepared as additional displays corresponding to all of the patterns 1 to 9. may

Modifications of the decorative designs of the first and second aspects will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the additional display displayed in addition to the numbers forming the decorative pattern. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modifications of the decorative designs of the first mode and the second mode.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative patterns of the first mode are composed of numbers and characters as additional displays corresponding to these numbers, and the decorative patterns of the second mode are composed of numbers without additional displays. Configured. In the modified example described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, any one of the additional images A to C, which are effect images different from the character, is the decorative pattern regardless of the form of the decorative pattern. is always appended to the digits that make up the The additional images A to C are additional displays that are superimposed on the rear side of the numbers forming the decorative design in any of the decorative designs of the first mode and the second mode.

Specifically, in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed behind the numbers and in front of the character, which is another additional display (Fig. 66(A)). In addition, in the decorative pattern of the second mode, one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed behind the number (see FIG. 66(B)).

The additional images A to C may or may not move in the same manner as the additional display characters. Specifically, the additional images A to C are, for example, when the decorative design of the first mode is temporarily stopped, and when the decorative design of the first mode changes to the decorative design of the second mode (and On the contrary), it oscillates in synchronism with the minute movements of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern. Also, during scrolling, the additional images A to C do not oscillate regardless of the scrolling speed. Further, when the special symbols are statically displayed, the numerals constituting the decorative symbols become static images, and the additional images A to C are static images as well as the additional characters. Incidentally, in another embodiment, the additional images A to C may move while the numbers forming the decorative symbols are still images during the static display of the special symbols.

The additional image A is an ocher image, and is an additional display corresponding to the odd-numbered symbols other than the 7 symbols (see FIG. 65(A)). The additional image B is a silver image having the same pattern as the additional image A, and is an additional display corresponding to even-numbered patterns (see FIG. 65(B)). Further, the additional display C is a golden image with a pattern different from that of the additional images A and B, and is an additional display corresponding to 7 patterns.

Since the type of the additional image is uniquely determined for one decorative pattern, it is possible to determine whether the number forming the decorative pattern is an odd number, an even number or "7" depending on the type of the additional image. As a result, for example, the element related to the color of the decorative pattern (specifically, the number) is green and the additional image A is the additional image A (that is, the odd-numbered pattern other than the 7 patterns). It can be suggested that the degree of expectation for the big win and the degree of expectation for shifting to the variable probability gaming state are higher in the case of the additional image B (that is, the even-numbered pattern). Further, for example, when the element related to the color of the decorative pattern is green and is the additional image C (that is, 7 patterns), the expectation of the jackpot and the expectation of shifting to the variable probability gaming state are higher than in the case of other combinations It can be suggested that the degree is high.

Since the additional displays A to C are attached to the decorative patterns of the first mode and the decorative patterns of the second mode, they are always displayed when the decorative patterns are displayed during the variable display of the special patterns. In the normal mode (during the normal game state) and the variable probability mode (during the variable probability game state), the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are the same, and the additional images A to C can be displayed. Thereby, a sense of unity can be given to these different production modes.

Note that the additional image A and the additional image B may be images with different colors, or may be images having the same form in one part and different form in the other part.

Further, a plurality of additional images may be associated with one number forming the decorative pattern. For example, when the additional image A or the additional image C is added to one number, the higher the reliability of the big win, the easier the additional image C is added, and the lower the reliability, the easier the additional image A is added. good. Note that the additional image C may be added in the case of a big win, but may not be added in the case of a loss.

When such decorative patterns are used, for example, BGM1 is output while the three decorative patterns fluctuate at high speed before establishing a ready-to-win state, and when the decorative patterns stop to the left or right (or when they stop), the character as an additional display is displayed. It may move, and when this motion stops, the reach establishment sound may be output and the BGM1 may stop. During the N-reach performance after the establishment of the ready-to-win, BGM2 is output, the decoration patterns stop to the left and right, and at this time the additional display character does not move. Next, when the N reach effect develops into the SP reach effect, the additional display character moves, the SP development sound is output in synchronism with this movement, and the BGM2 is stopped. In other words, before and after the BGM is switched, the character added to the decorative pattern may move in synchronism.

[Structure of gaming machine according to the present invention and its effect]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that parentheses indicate correspondence with the embodiment, and are merely examples.

(Configuration 1)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 1 includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when a starting condition is established, and a special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means, based on the result of the special game determination, a first effect can be executed, based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a second effect, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and during the first effect , the reproduction processing of the sound output before the execution of the first performance can be continued, and the output of the sound output before the execution of the second performance is stopped during the second performance.

According to this configuration 1, when the first effect (for example, notice effect, premiere effect, etc.) is executed, the output of sound (for example, BGM 1) is continued, while the second effect (for example, jackpot notification effect, development effect) etc.) is executed, the sound (for example, BGM4 etc.) is stopped. Thereby, for example, BGM is continuously output even when the first performance is executed and not executed, so that the performance can be advanced according to the flow of the music and the continuity of the performance can be maintained. On the other hand, when the second performance is executed, the BGM that has been playing until just before is stopped, so that the player can concentrate on the second performance and the expectation of the player can be enhanced, and the second performance can be emphasized.

In configuration 1 above, the first effect and the second effect may be executed in one variation of the symbol. Further, in configuration 1, the second effect may be an effect performed after the first effect. Further, in configuration 1, the second effect may be a effect with a higher degree of expectation than the first effect. Further, during the first presentation, the sound may be internally reproduced, but the output of the sound may be suppressed (the volume may be reduced or the volume may be set to "0").

(Configuration 2)
The gaming machine according to configuration 2 comprises a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when a starting condition is established, and a special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. Design control means for notifying the result of determination, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, and said effect control means is determined to execute a special game in said special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and if the special game is executed in the special game determination When it is determined, the first effect pattern including the fixed effect of the first number of times is executed, and the second effect pattern including the fixed effect of the second number of times different from the first number of times is executed. Yes, when the first effect pattern is executed, the output of the sound output before the execution of the fixed effect is stopped during the first fixed effect, and the second effect pattern is executed. , during the confirmed effect before the second confirmed effect, the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the confirmed effect can be continued, and during the second confirmed effect, The output of the sound output before execution of the fixed performance is stopped.

According to this configuration 2, even if the first number of times (for example, only the last big hit notification effect) is performed, the second number of times (for example, the premier effect during the pre-reach effect or during the reach effect and the last big hit notification effect) 2 times of production) Even when the fixed production is performed, the BGM is continuously output before the final notification production, so the production can be progressed according to the flow of the music, and the continuity of the production can be maintained. . In addition, since the BGM is stopped in any case in the final fixed effect, the player can be made to concentrate on the final fixed effect, and the final fixed effect can be emphasized.

In configuration 2 above, the execution ratio of the second effect pattern may be lower than the execution ratio of the first effect pattern. For example, the ratio of execution of the second effect pattern may be higher or lower than that of the first effect pattern. Further, the first effect pattern may be executed more easily when the symbol variation time is longer than when the symbol variation time is short. Further, the second effect pattern may be executed more easily when the symbol variation time is longer than when the symbol variation time is short. Also, the second number of times may be greater than the first number of times. Also, the first number of times may be one or more, and the second number of times may be two or more. Further, the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern may be selected according to the fluctuation time of the symbol. For example, when the symbol variation time is the first time, the first effect pattern is selected (at a rate of 100%), and the symbol variation time is longer (or shorter) than the first time, and is the second time. In this case, the second effect pattern may be selected (at a rate of 100%).

(Composition 3)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 3 comprises a determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed when a starting condition is established, and a special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. Design control means for notifying the result of determination, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, and said effect control means is determined to execute a special game in said special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a confirmation effect suggesting that the special game will be executed, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect to prompt the player to operate the operation means that can be operated, and the sound output from the output means When it is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination, when executing a first effect pattern including the fixed effect of the first number of times, and the first number of times and There is a case where a second effect pattern including the fixed effect of a different second number of times is executed, and when the first effect pattern is executed, an operation promoting effect is performed before executing the fixed effect of the first number of times. During the operation prompting effect, the output of the sound output before the operation prompting effect is executed is stopped, and when the second effect pattern is executed, the second effect is performed before the second fixed effect. During the confirmation effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that has been output before the execution of the confirmation effect, and the operation promotion effect is executed before the second confirmation effect is executed, and the operation promotion effect is performed. During the production, the output of the sound output before the execution of the operation promotion production is stopped.

Configuration 3 has the following effects in addition to configuration 2. That is, in the case of either the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern, by performing the operation promotion effect to prompt the operation of the operating means immediately before the final fixed effect (for example, the big win notification effect), The operation can be guided to the player, and the player can be prepared for the operation. Further, since the confirmation effect is performed according to the operation, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means. In addition, since the BGM is continuously reproduced during the execution of the fixed performance before the final fixed performance (for example, during the pre-ready performance or the premier performance during the ready-to-win performance), the continuity of the performance can be maintained. Immediately before the final fixed performance, the operation promoting performance is performed, and the BGM is stopped during the operation promoting performance, so that the player is kept in a quiet state when performing the operation, and the player can concentrate on the operation, and immediately before the final fixed performance. It is possible to make the player's heart pound. In other words, the noisy state suddenly changes to a quiet state, and the user is prompted to operate the operating means, so that the user can concentrate on the operation and can increase the thrill of the operation.

In configuration 3 above, for example, the probability of execution of the second effect pattern may be higher or lower than that of the first effect pattern. Further, the first effect pattern may be executed more easily when the symbol variation time is longer than when the symbol variation time is short. Further, the second effect pattern may be executed more easily when the symbol variation time is longer than when the symbol variation time is short. Also, the second number of times may be greater than the first number of times. Also, the first number of times may be one or more, and the second number of times may be two or more.

(Composition 4)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 4 comprises a determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed when a starting condition is established, and a special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. Design control means for notifying the result of determination, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, and said effect control means is determined to execute a special game in said special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a confirmation effect suggesting that the special game will be executed, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect to prompt the player to operate the operation means that can be operated, and the sound output from the output means When it is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination, when executing a first effect pattern including the fixed effect of the first number of times, and the first number of times and There is a case where a second effect pattern including the fixed effect of a different second number of times is executed, and when the first effect pattern is executed, an operation promoting effect is performed before executing the fixed effect of the first number of times. During the operation prompting effect, the output of the sound output before the operation prompting effect is executed is stopped, and when the second effect pattern is executed, the second effect is performed before the second fixed effect. During the confirmation effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that has been output before the execution of the confirmation effect, and the operation promotion effect is executed before the second confirmation effect is executed, and the operation promotion effect is performed. During the performance, the output of the sound output before execution of the operation promotion performance is stopped, and the execution probability of the second performance pattern is lower than the execution probability of the first performance pattern.

According to configuration 4, in addition to the configuration similar to configuration 3, the execution probability of the second effect pattern is lower than the execution probability of the first effect pattern. As a result, an effect similar to that of configuration 3 can be obtained, and it is possible to make it difficult to execute the fixed effect while the BGM is being output, so that the player's attention can be directed to the BGM.

In configuration 4, a first operation prompting effect is performed before the finalized effect before the second fixed effect is executed, and during the first operation prompting effect, before the execution of the first operation prompting effect. You may continue the reproduction process of the sound output from. The operation prompting effect (second operation prompting effect) is performed before the first or second fixation effect is executed. With such a configuration, since the operation prompting effect is performed a plurality of times, expectations can be increased step by step each time the operation is performed. Also, the start timing of the first fixed effect may be shifted depending on the timing of the operation during the first operation promoting effect, but since the BGM does not stop during the first operation promoting effect, subsequent effects can be performed in accordance with the flow of the music. It can be progressed and the continuity of production can be maintained. For example, on the premise that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started at a certain timing in the BGM (for example, at the start of the chorus), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is always performed at the same timing even if the operation timings during the first operation promoting effect are different. can start. In addition, the number of executions of the operation prompting effect when it is determined to be a big win is diversified, and the range of the effect is widened, making it possible to make the game machine more interesting and less boring.

In a configuration capable of executing the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect, the first operation guidance sound is output when the first operation promotion effect is performed, and the second operation promotion effect is performed. may output a second operation guide sound different from the first operation guide sound. In this case, it is possible to recognize the confirmation effect to be executed according to the operation by the operation guidance sound. The second operation guidance sound may be longer than the first operation guidance sound. When the BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it does not interfere with the music. On the other hand, when the BGM stops, it is possible to output a relatively long second operation guidance sound, which enhances interest. Also, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be different effects, or may be the same effect. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be effects prompting the user to operate different operation means. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect are effects that encourage the operation of the same operating means, and may be different effects. In addition, the effect based on the second effect pattern may be more easily executed when the variation time of the symbol is longer than when the variation time is short. Also, the second number of times may be greater than the first number of times. Also, the first number of times may be one or more, and the second number of times may be two or more.

(Composition 5)
The gaming machine according to configuration 5 comprises a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when a starting condition is established, and a special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. Design control means for notifying the result of determination, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, and said effect control means is determined to execute a special game in said special game determination. In the case, it is possible to execute a fixed effect suggesting that the special game will be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed, It is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and when it is determined to execute the special game in the special game determination, when executing the first effect pattern including the fixed effect, and the notice There is a time when a second effect pattern including the effect and the confirmed effect is executed, and when the first effect pattern is executed, during the confirmed effect, the sound that was output before the execution of the confirmed effect is output. In the case of stopping and executing the second effect pattern, during the notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that has been output before the execution of the notice effect, and during the confirmed effect, the confirmed effect is performed. Stops outputting sounds that were being output before execution.

According to this configuration 5, since the sound (BGM) continues during the notice performance, the BGM can be stopped at the same timing in the final fixed performance regardless of whether the notice performance is performed or not. . By continuing the BGM during the advance notice performance, the continuity of the performance can be maintained, while the BGM is stopped when the fixed performance is executed, thereby enhancing the excitement and emphasizing the fixed performance.

(Composition 6)
The gaming machine according to configuration 6 comprises: when a starting condition is satisfied, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player; Design control means for notifying the result of determination, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, and said effect control means is determined to execute a special game in said special game determination. In the case, it is possible to execute a fixed effect that suggests that the special game will be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed, and the game It is possible to execute an operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and it is determined in the special game determination that the special game is to be executed. In this case, there are times when the first effect pattern including the confirmed effect is executed and times when the second effect pattern including the advance notice effect and the confirmed effect is executed, and when the first effect pattern is executed, A case where an operation prompting performance is executed before the confirmation performance is executed, and during the operation prompting performance, the output of the sound output before the operation prompting performance is executed is stopped, and the second performance pattern is executed. , during the notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that has been output before the execution of the notice effect, and the operation promotion effect is executed before the confirmation effect is executed, The output of the sound that was output before execution of the operation prompting effect is stopped.

According to this configuration 6, in addition to the same effect as the configuration 5, since the operation promotion performance is performed before executing the fixed performance, the player can be guided to the operation, and the player is made to prepare for the operation. be able to. Further, since the confirmation effect is performed according to the operation, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means. In addition, since the BGM is continuously reproduced during the execution of the announcement effect (for example, during the pre-reach effect or during the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. In addition, immediately before the confirmation effect, the operation promotion effect is performed, and the BGM is stopped during the operation promotion effect, so that the player is kept in a quiet state when performing the operation so that the player can concentrate on the operation, and the game is played immediately before the confirmation effect. It can make people's heart beat faster.

In configuration 6 above, before executing the advance notice effect, the first operation promoting effect is performed, and during the first operation promoting effect, the sound output before the execution of the first operation promoting effect is reproduced. You may continue. The operation prompting effect (second operation prompting effect) is performed before the confirmation effect is executed. With such a configuration, since the advance notice effect is performed in the first operation and the confirmation effect is performed in the second operation, the expectation can be increased step by step each time the operation is performed. In addition, in this configuration, the BGM continues in the first operation promotion effect before the notice effect with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, 10% to 50%), while the BGM continues before the final effect with a high degree of expectation (100%). The BGM stops in the second operation prompting effect. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the continuity of the production before executing the production with low expectations (advance production), and further increase the expectations before executing the production with high expectations (fixed production). A balance can be achieved between smoothing the flow of production and enhancing gambling.

In a configuration capable of executing the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect, the first operation guidance sound is output when the first operation promotion effect is performed, and the second operation promotion effect is performed. may output a second operation guide sound different from the first operation guide sound. In this case, the second operation guide sound may be longer than the first operation guide sound. When the BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it does not interfere with the music. On the other hand, when the BGM stops, it is possible to output a relatively long second operation guidance sound, which enhances interest. Also, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be different effects, or may be the same effect. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be effects prompting the user to operate different operation means. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect are effects that encourage the operation of the same operating means, and may be different effects. Further, it may be easier (or more difficult) to execute the effect based on the second effect pattern when the symbol variation time is longer than when the symbol variation time is short.

(Composition 7)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 7 comprises, when a starting condition is satisfied, a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, and the special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means, based on the result of the special game determination, the special game It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of being played, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is a different effect from the notice effect, and it is a specification that suggests that there is a high possibility that the special game will be played. An effect can be executed, and before the specific effect, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the specific effect will be performed, and it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means. During the notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before the execution of the notice effect, and during the specific suggestion effect, the sound that was output before the execution of the specific suggestion effect Stop output.

According to this configuration, since the sound (BGM) continues during the notice effect, the specific suggestive effect (for example, SP development effect, SPSP development effect) is the same regardless of whether the notice effect is performed or not. BGM can be stopped at the timing. By continuing the BGM in the advance notice performance, the continuity of the performance can be maintained, while in the specific suggestive performance, by stopping the BGM, the expectation for development to the highly anticipated specific performance can be enhanced. In addition, expectations can be heightened step by step from advance notice effects to specific suggestive effects, and expectations can be further increased by stopping the BGM.

In configuration 7 above, the effect control means may be capable of executing the advance notice effect and the specific effect in one pattern change, and execute the notice effect and the specific effect in one pattern change. In this case, during the notice effect, the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the notice effect can be continued, and during the specific suggestion effect, the sound that was output before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. Sound output may be stopped. Further, in configuration 7 above, the specific suggestive effect may be an effect that suggests development to a specific effect and that allows the player to recognize the type of the specific effect. Further, the specific suggestion effect may be a blackout effect, or a switching effect (effect indicating switching of a background image or a decorative pattern) indicating switching to a specific effect.

(Composition 8)
The gaming machine according to configuration 8 comprises: when a starting condition is satisfied, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player; A symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means, based on the result of the special game determination, the special game It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of being played, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is a different effect from the notice effect, and it is a specification that suggests that there is a high possibility that the special game will be played. An effect can be executed, and before the specific effect, a specific suggestive effect that suggests that the specific effect will be performed can be executed, and an operation promoting effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated is executed. It is possible, and it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and when the first effect pattern including the specific effect is executed based on the result of the special game determination, and the notice There is a case where a second effect pattern including the effect and the specific effect is executed, and when the first effect pattern is executed, an operation promoting effect is executed before executing the specific suggestive effect, and during the operation promoting effect. stops the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect, and when the second effect pattern is executed, the sound that was output before the execution of the previous notice effect during the announcement effect can be continued, and before executing the specific suggestive effect, the operation promoting effect is executed, and during the operation promoting effect, the output of the sound output before the operation promoting effect is stopped. .

According to this configuration 8, in addition to the same effect as configuration 7, since the operation promotion effect is performed before executing the specific suggestive effect, the player can be guided to the operation, and the player can be prepared for the operation. can be made In addition, since the specific suggestion effect is performed according to the operation, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means. In addition, since the BGM is continuously reproduced during the execution of the announcement effect (for example, during the pre-reach effect or during the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. In addition, immediately before the specific suggestion performance, the operation promotion performance is performed, and the BGM is stopped during the operation promotion performance, so that the player can concentrate on the operation by making it quiet when performing the operation, and immediately before the specific suggestion performance. It is possible to make the player's heart pound.

In the configuration 8 above, before executing the advance notice effect, the first operation promoting effect is performed, and during the first operation promoting effect, the sound output before the execution of the first operation promoting effect is reproduced. You may continue. The operation prompting effect (second operation prompting effect) is performed before executing the specific suggestion effect. With such a configuration, since the advance notice effect is performed in the first operation and the specific suggestion effect is performed in the second operation, the expectation can be increased step by step each time the operation is performed. Further, in this configuration, BGM continues in the first operation promoting effect before the notice effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, while the BGM stops in the second operation promoting effect before the specific effect with a high degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the continuity of the production before executing the production with low expectations (advance production), and further increase the expectations before executing the production with high expectations (specific production). A balance can be achieved between smoothing the flow of production and enhancing gambling.

In a configuration capable of executing the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect, the first operation guidance sound is output when the first operation promotion effect is performed, and the second operation promotion effect is performed. may output a second operation guide sound different from the first operation guide sound. In this case, the second operation guide sound may be longer than the first operation guide sound. When the BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it does not interfere with the music. On the other hand, when the BGM stops, it is possible to output a relatively long second operation guidance sound, which enhances interest. Also, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be different effects, or may be the same effect. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be effects prompting the user to operate different operation means. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect are effects that encourage the operation of the same operating means, and may be different effects. Further, it may be easier (or more difficult) to execute the effect based on the second effect pattern when the symbol variation time is longer than when the symbol variation time is short.

(Composition 9)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 9 comprises, when a starting condition is established, a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, and the special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means, based on the result of the special game determination, a first effect (For example, it is possible to execute a notice effect during the pre-reach effect or during the reach effect), and based on the result of the special game determination, the second effect in which the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect An effect (for example, a last big win notification effect, etc.) can be executed, and before the first effect is executed, a first operation prompting effect for prompting the player to operate the operation means that can be operated can be executed, Before executing the second effect, it is possible to execute a second operation promotion effect to prompt the player to operate the operation means, and to control the output of the sound output from the output means. , during the first operation-promoting effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that has been output before the execution of the first operation-promoting effect, and during the second operation-promoting effect, the second operation-promoting effect is performed. The output of the sound output before execution is stopped, the first effect sound can be output in the first operation promotion performance, and the second effect sound can be output in the second operation promotion performance.

According to this configuration 9, the second effect sound is output in the second operation promoting effect immediately before the second effect, and the first effect sound is output in the first operation promoting effect immediately before the first effect. For example, when the degree of expectation for the second effect is higher than that for the first effect, the expectation of the player can be heightened by the second effect sound. In addition, since the BGM is stopped during the second operation promotion effect, the second effect sound (for example, a louder sound than the first effect sound, a longer sound than the first effect sound, a sound longer than the first effect sound, etc.) By outputting a flashy sound, the expectation is further increased, and a sharp performance can be achieved, thereby improving the interest.

In the above configuration 9, the effect control means can execute the first effect and the second effect in one variation of the symbol, and the first effect and the second effect are performed in one variation of the symbol. 2 effect can be executed, during the first operation prompting effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before the execution of the first operation prompting effect, and during the second operation prompting effect, , the output of the sound output before execution of the second operation prompting effect may be stopped. Also, the first effect sound may be output immediately before execution of the first operation prompting effect, may be output immediately after execution of the first operation prompting effect, or may be output during execution of the first operation prompting effect. may be Also, the second effect sound may be output immediately before execution of the second operation prompting effect, may be output immediately after execution of the second operation prompting effect, or may be output during execution of the second operation prompting effect. may be Also, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be different effects, or may be the same effect. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect may be effects prompting the user to operate different operation means. Further, the second operation prompting effect and the first operation prompting effect are effects that encourage the operation of the same operating means, and may be different effects. In addition, during the variable display of the symbols, there are times when the first performance pattern including the second performance without including the first performance is executed, and there are times when the second performance pattern including the first performance and the second performance is executed. On this premise, it may be easier (or more difficult) to execute the effect based on the second effect pattern when the variation time of the symbol is longer than when the variation time is short. Further, the first production pattern or the second production pattern is selected according to the variation time of the symbols, and the production based on the second production pattern is selected (at a rate of 100%) when the variation time of the symbols is long. , and if the pattern variation time is short, the effect based on the first effect pattern may be selected (at a rate of 100%).

(Configuration 10)
The gaming machine according to configuration 10 comprises a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when a starting condition is established, and the special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. Design control means for notifying the result of determination, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, and said effect control means is determined to execute a special game in said special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a fixed effect suggesting that the special game will be executed, and it is possible to execute a first notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed based on the result of the special game determination. , based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a second notice effect different from the first notice effect, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, During the first notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before the execution of the first notice effect, and during the confirmation effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the confirmation effect can be continued. There are times when the first notice effect is executed together with the second notice effect, and the fixed effect is not executed together with the second notice effect.

According to this configuration 10, since the first notice effect is executed in combination with the second notice effect and not executed in combination, it is possible to give variations to the notice effect. On the other hand, as for the confirmed effect, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the confirmed effect, which is not executed in combination with the second notice effect. By stopping the BGM in the finalized performance, the player can concentrate more on the finalized performance. The effect control means may be capable of executing the first notice effect and the confirmed effect in one symbol change, and the first notice effect and the confirmed effect are executed in one symbol change. When executed, during the first notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that has been output before the execution of the first notice effect, and during the confirmed effect, the sound is output before the execution of the confirmed effect. You may stop outputting the sound you were playing.

(Composition 11)
The gaming machine according to configuration 11 comprises, when a starting condition is established, a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, and the special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. Design control means for notifying the result of determination, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, and said effect control means is determined to execute a special game in said special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and as the definite effect, a first predetermined number of It is possible to execute a first fixed effect performed using the effect means and a second fixed effect performed using the effect means of a second predetermined number different from the first predetermined number, and the first fixed effect is being performed. can continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the first fixed effect, and during the second fixed effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second fixed effect can be continued. Stop.

According to this configuration 11, in the first fixed effect, the effect is performed using the first predetermined number of effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 5, the frame lamp 37), and in the second fixed effect, the number is different from the first predetermined number. The effect can be performed using a second predetermined number of effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 5, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the movable accessory 7). For example, the second predetermined number may be greater than the first predetermined number. In the first fixed performance, a relatively small number of performance means is used, and the BGM does not stop, so that players who are unfamiliar with the gaming machine have somewhat higher expectations, and the game is played by those who know the gaming machine. For people, it is possible to convince the jackpot and raise expectations at once. In the second fixed effect, BGM is stopped and flashy effects are performed using a relatively large number of effect means, so expectations and satisfaction can be enhanced for all players. In addition, by stopping the BGM, attention can be drawn to the flashy presentation, and interest can be improved. In addition, the effect control means can execute the first fixed effect and the second fixed effect in one pattern change, and the first fixed effect and the second fixed effect in one pattern change. When the performance is executed, during the first finalized performance, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before the execution of the first finalized performance, and during the second finalized performance, the second finalized performance. You may stop the output of the sound output before execution of production|presentation.

In the second fixed effect, any number of effect means may be used as long as the effect is more decorative than the first fixed effect. Here, highly decorative effects are effects that look flashy to the player. For example, in the second confirmation effect, the movable accessory 7 operates and an image suggesting the confirmation of the big win is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and in the first confirmation effect, the movable accessory 7 does not operate and the liquid crystal display device. At 5, an image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. In addition, in the second fixed effect, a louder sound may be output than when the first fixed effect is executed, a flashy sound (for example, a high-pitched sound) may be output, or a long sound may be output. may be Also, in the second confirmation effect, confirmation of the big win may be suggested by a plurality of images, while in the first confirmation effect, confirmation of the big win may be suggested by fewer images than in the second confirmation effect. Also, in the second confirmation effect, confirmation of the big win may be suggested by a relatively large image, while in the first confirmation effect, confirmation of the big win may be suggested by an image smaller than the second confirmation effect. Further, in the second fixed effect, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in various kinds of colors, while in the first fixed effect, the board lamp 25 and/or the board lamp 25 and/or emit light in fewer kinds of colors than in the second fixed effect. Alternatively, the frame lamp 37 may emit light. Further, in the second fixed effect, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light relatively brightly, while in the first fixed effect, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light darker than the second fixed effect. may In addition, the production button 26 and the production lever 28 may vibrate strongly in the second fixed production, while the production button 26 and the production lever 28 may vibrate weaker in the first fixed production than in the second fixed production.

(Composition 12)
The gaming machine according to configuration 12 comprises a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed when a starting condition is established, and a special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means, based on the result of the special game determination, a first effect (For example, advance notice effect and premium effect) can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect Second effect (for example, SPSP development effect , SPSP ready-to-win effect, jackpot confirmation effect) can be executed, and before executing the first effect, a first operation promoting effect can be executed to prompt the player to operate the operating means, and the first operation promoting effect can be executed. Before executing the second effect, it is possible to execute a second operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means that can be operated, and it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, During the first operation-promoting effect, it is possible to continue playing the sound output before the execution of the first operation-promoting effect, and during the second operation-promoting effect, the second operation-promoting effect is executed. The output of the previously output sound is stopped, the first operation prompting effect is a performance prompting the operating means to be operated in the first operation mode, and the second operation promoting effect is the second operation prompting effect for the operating means. This is an effect that prompts an operation in the second operation mode, which is different from the first operation mode.

According to this configuration 12, it is possible to perform the first operation promoting effect and the second operation promoting effect before the second effect having a different degree of expectation for a big win from the first effect and the first effect. For example, the degree of expectation may be higher for the second effect than for the first effect. In this case, in the second operation promoting effect immediately before the second effect with a higher degree of expectation, since the operation is performed in the second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the second operation promoting effect is recognized as special. , can increase player expectations. Also, since the BGM is stopped during the second operation prompting effect, the player can concentrate on the operation in the second operation mode. Further, when the degree of expectation for the second effect is higher than that for the first effect, the frequency of occurrence of the operation according to the second operation mode is lower than that of the operation according to the first operation mode, so that the player is puzzled by the operation. However, by stopping the BGM, the player can prepare for the operation and perform the correct operation.

(Composition 13)
The gaming machine according to configuration 13 comprises a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed when a starting condition is established, and the special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. Symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, and a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern different from the first variation pattern as the variation pattern of the symbols based on the result of the special game determination. Variation pattern determination means for determining any one of a plurality of variation patterns including, output means for outputting sound, and effect control means for controlling effect, wherein the effect control means is the special game determination Based on the result, a first effect (for example, advance notice effect or premium effect) can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect. Two productions (for example, SPSP development production, SPSP reach production) can be executed, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and during the first production, the first production It is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before the execution, and during the second effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect is stopped, and the variation pattern determining means stops the output of the sound. When the first variation pattern is determined, the second effect can be executed in the first effect mode, and when the second variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determination means, the first effect The second effect can be executed in a second effect mode different from the mode.

According to this configuration 13, it is possible to give variation to the effect by making the second effect different depending on the variation pattern. In addition, since the BGM continues in the first effect in both the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern, the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, as for the second effect, since the BGM is stopped in any case, it is possible to make the player's heart throb and make the player recognize that the degree of expectation is high. Even if the timing at which the second effect is started differs due to the different variation patterns, the player's expectation can be heightened by stopping the BGM.

Note that different characters, items, and characters may be displayed in the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode. In addition, the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode may display images of the same characters, items, or characters but with different colors (or patterns). . Also, the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode may differ depending on whether or not the effect image is added to the same image. Also, the second effect may be a effect with a higher degree of expectation than the first effect. Also, the second variation pattern may have a longer variation time than the first variation pattern.

(Composition 14)
The gaming machine according to configuration 14 comprises, when a starting condition is established, a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, and the special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means, based on the result of the special game determination, a first effect can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect, and the sound output from the output means It is possible to perform output control, during the first effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that has been output before the execution of the first effect, and during the second effect, the second effect stop outputting the sound output before the execution of the first effect, and can continue to output the sound output before the execution of the first effect even after the execution of the first effect, and the second effect After execution of , it is possible to output a sound different from the sound output before execution of the second effect.

According to this configuration 14, the continuity of the effect can be maintained by not changing the type of BGM before and after the execution of the first effect. On the other hand, by stopping the BGM during execution of the second effect and outputting another BGM after the execution of the second effect, the effect can be switched smoothly. Also, by stopping the BGM that has been playing until then before switching to another BGM, it is possible to expect that the performance will develop into a highly anticipated performance.

It should be noted that the volume of the BGM may not be changed before and after the execution of the first effect. Also, the volume of BGM may be changed before and after execution of the second effect. For example, after execution of the second effect, the volume of BGM may be raised more than before execution of the first effect. Further, the second effect may be an effect suggesting that a special game is more likely to be performed than the first effect.

(Composition 15)
In the gaming machine according to configuration 15, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by changing the symbols and then stopping the special game. A design control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect are provided, and the effect control means is capable of displaying a background image on a display means. , based on the result of the special game determination, a first effect (for example, advance notice effect and premium effect) can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is the first A second effect (for example, an SPSP development effect) different from the first effect can be executed, and output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed, and during the first effect, the first effect It is possible to continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before execution of the effect, and during the second effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect is stopped, and the second effect is performed. , is an effect of displaying at least part of the background image in a darkened state.

According to this configuration 15, for example, by blacking out the display screen and stopping the BGM as the second effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the effect has stopped, thereby raising expectations for the next effect. be able to. The second effect may be an effect suggesting that a special game is more likely to be performed than the first effect.

(Composition 16)
The gaming machine according to configuration 16 comprises a determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when a starting condition is established, and the special game by varying symbols and then stopping the special game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling an effect, the effect control means, based on the result of the special game determination, a first effect can be executed, based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a second effect, it is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means, and during the first effect , the reproduction process of the first sound output before the execution of the first effect can be continued, and during the second effect, the reproduction of the second sound output before the execution of the second effect can be continued. When the output is stopped and the first effect is started when a first time has passed since the start of reproduction of the first sound, and when a second time has passed since the start of reproduction of the first sound There is a time to start the first effect, and the second effect is started when the third time elapses from the start of reproduction of the second sound.

According to this configuration 16, there are times when the first effect starts when the first time elapses from the start of reproduction of the BGM, and when it starts when the second time elapses. starts when a fixed third time elapses from the start of BGM reproduction. That is, since the first effect is started at a random reproduction position of the BGM, it is possible to add surprise to the effect. On the other hand, since the second effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM, the player can predict the start timing of the second effect in accordance with the music.

It should be noted that the third time may vary depending on the variation pattern of the symbols.

1 pachinko game machine 5 liquid crystal display device 7 movable accessory 11 first start port 12 second start port 13 big winning port 24 speaker 25 board lamp 26 effect button 28 effect lever 37 frame lamp 41 first special symbol display device 42 second second Special symbol indicator 51 Decoration symbol 52 Suspension display 53 During fluctuation display 55 4th symbol 60 Premier character 65 Predetermined character 80, 83 Button image 81, 84 Effective period image 101, 131, 141, 151 CPU
130 effect control unit 140 image sound control unit 150 lamp control unit

Claims (1)

determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the starting condition is satisfied;
Prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute a special game before the special game determination is performed;
Symbol control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by changing and then stopping the symbols;
an output means for outputting sound;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
capable of receiving a predetermined signal,
Based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a first effect and a suggestive effect suggesting that a special game will be played,
It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation means,
It is possible to perform output control of the sound output from the output means,
When it is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination, when executing a first effect pattern including the suggestive effect of the first effect and the first number of times, and a second number of times different from the first number of times and executing a second effect pattern including the suggestive effect,
When executing the first effect pattern, during the first effect, it is possible to continue outputting the first sound that has been output before the execution of the first effect, and before executing the suggestive effect, the operation A promotion performance is executed, and in accordance with the execution of the operation promotion performance, the second sound output before execution of the operation promotion performance is stopped and the output of a predetermined sound different from the second sound is restricted. is possible and
When the second effect pattern is executed, during the first suggestive effect executed before the second suggestive effect, the first sound output before the first suggestive effect is executed. The output can be continued, the operation prompting effect is executed before executing the second suggestion effect, and the operation prompting effect is output in response to the execution of the operation prompting effect. stop the second sound,
When the first effect is started when the first time has passed since the output start of the first sound, and when the first effect is started when the second time has passed since the output start of the first sound and
capable of outputting the first sound in response to the start of variation of the pattern;
A gaming machine capable of outputting a pre-effect sound based on the pre-determination during a predetermined period in which the second sound is stopped.

Images